The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About19257_IFP_2.28.2020 Specifications Everest – Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street, City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 Issue for Permit Project No. 19257 February 28, 2020 February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Table of Contents 00 01 10 - 1 DOCUMENT 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION DOCUMENT NO. TITLE 00 01 01 COVER 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS DOCUMENT NO. TITLE PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS TO BE PROVIDED BY THE OWNER OR CONSTRUCTION MANAGER CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS DOCUMENT NO. TITLE CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS TO BE PROVIDED BY THE OWNER OR CONSTRUCTION MANAGER EXCEPT AS NOTED BELOW 00 72 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS: AIA A201 - “GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION” DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION NO. TITLE 01 10 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS SECTION NO. TITLE 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE SECTION NO. TITLE NOT USED February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Table of Contents 00 01 10 - 2 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY SECTION NO. TITLE NOT USED DIVISION 05 - METALS SECTION NO. TITLE STRUCTURAL STEEL AND METAL DECKING SECTIONS TO BE PROVIDED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER EXCEPT AS NOTED BELOW 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS SECTION NO. TITLE 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION NO. TITLE 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 43 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS SECTION NO. TITLE 08 11 23 INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 81 00 GLASS GLAZING 08 87 00 GLAZING FILM DIVISION 09 – FINISHES SECTION NO. TITLE 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 30 00 TILING 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASES February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Table of Contents 00 01 10 - 3 09 65 36 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING 09 68 00 CARPETING 09 72 00 WALL COVERINGS 09 77 13 STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEMS 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION NO. TITLE 10 11 00.16 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 22 19 DEMOUNTABLE METAL AND GLASS PARTITIONS 10 22 39 VERTICALLY FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 10 28 00 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT SECTION NO. TITLE 11 31 13 PANTRY EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS SECTION NO. TITLE 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION NO. TITLE NOT USED February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Table of Contents 00 01 10 - 4 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS SECTION NO. TITLE DIVISIONS 15 – 20 NOT USED DIVISIONS 21 - 28 SECTIONS TO BE PROVIDE BY THE FIRE PROTECTION, PLUMBING, HVAC, AND ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS UNDER SEPARATE COVER EXCEPT AS NOTED BELOW. DIVISIONS 26 – ELECTRICAL SECTION NO. TITLE 26 51 00.02 INTERIOR LIGHTING DIVISION 29 – 49 NOT USED END OF DOCUMENT February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 General Conditions 00 72 13 - 1 DOCUMENT 00 72 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 AIA DOCUMENT A 201 – GENERAL CONDITIONS A. AIA Document A201 – General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, 2017 Edition as bound herein shall be considered a part of the Contract Documents and shall apply to all Contractors and Subcontractors. Copies are available from the American Institute of Architects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF DOCUMENT THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP General Requirements 01 00 00 - 1 SECTION 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Scope of Work: The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of, but is not limited to, tenant fit-out work on Level 1. 1. Project Name: Everest- Carmel, IN 2. Project Location: 11711 North Meridian Street, City of Carmel, Clay Township, Hamilton County, IN 46032 3. Owner: Everest Global Services, 477 Martinsville Road, Liberty Corner, NJ, 07938. 4. Owner’s Representative: Megan Cudia B. Contract Documents: Contract Documents dated November 1, 2019, were prepared for the Project by HLW International Architecture & Engineering LLP, 122 Main Street, Madison, NJ. C. Type of Contract: Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.02 USE OF PREMISES A. Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Confine operations to areas within contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner, the Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. 2. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations, and space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. B. Owner Use of Premises: 1. The Contractor shall coordinate work with the Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. 2. During progress of construction, the Owner may grant permission to others to use the premises for installation of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall cooperate with the suppliers and installers of such work. 3. The Owner reserves the right to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided that such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the work. Placing of equipment by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. C. Contractor Use of Premises: February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP General Requirements 01 00 00 - 2 1. Smoking is prohibited in the building. 2. Maintain the existing building in a weathertight condition throughout the construction period. 3. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 4. Take all precautions necessary to protect the building and its occupants during the construction period. 5. Limit use of the premises to construction activities in the areas indicated. Allow for Owner occupancy and public use if adjacent areas outside the Project limit lines. D. Use of the Existing Elevators: 1. The Contractor will be permitted to use one of the passenger elevators for freight service and for transportation of construction personnel during the construction period. Do not use other elevators. 2. The elevator shall be also available to the Owner at all times; coordinate with the Owner. 3. Provide protection pads for the cab and maintain other appropriate measures for the entrance doors and frames. 4. At Substantial Completion, restore the elevator used during construction to original condition. 1.03 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building prior to Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. The Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner occupancy. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from local building officials prior to Owner occupancy. 3. Prior to partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational. Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed. Upon occupancy, the Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of the building. 4. Upon occupancy, the Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of the building. 1.04 PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE A. General: The Owner has negotiated purchase orders with suppliers of material and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. The Owner has assigned these purchase orders to the Contractor. Costs for receiving, handling, storage, and installation are to be included in the Contract Sum. 1. The Contractor's responsibilities are the same as if the Contractor negotiated the purchase orders. If necessary, the Contractor shall renegotiate purchase and execute final purchase-order agreements. 2. Products ordered in advance: None. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP General Requirements 01 00 00 - 3 1.05 ALTERNATES A. Definition: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agree- ment. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. B. Procedures: 1. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 2. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. 3. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. 4. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. C. Schedule of Alternates: None. 1.06 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Schedule of Values: Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's Construction Schedule, Submittal Schedule, and List of Subcontracts. B. Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms. C. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual's table of contents as a guide to establish the format for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: 1. Project name and location. 2. Name of the Architect. 3. Project number. 4. Contractor's name and address. 5. Date of submittal. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP General Requirements 01 00 00 - 4 D. Arrange the Schedule of Values in a tabular form with separate columns, and in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. Round off amounts to the nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum. 1. Provide a separate line item for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. 2. Show line items for indirect costs and margins on costs only when such items are listed individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include the total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin for each item. E. Payment Application Forms/Time: Use AIA Document G 702 and Continuation Sheets G 703 as the form for Applications for Payment. Payment dates are indicated in the Agreement. The period covered by each application is the period indicated in the Agreement. F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry, including notarization and execution by a person authorized to sign on behalf of the Contractor. The Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. 3. Applications shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 3. Schedule of Values. 4. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. Copies of building permits. 8. Copies of licenses from governing authorities. 9. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 10. Performance and payment bonds. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. 1. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application include the following: a. Occupancy permits. b. Warranties and maintenance agreements. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP General Requirements 01 00 00 - 5 c. Test/adjust/balance records. d. Maintenance instructions. e. Meter readings. f. Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy. g. Final cleaning. h. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety. I. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following: 1. Completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 3. Transmittal of Project construction records to the Owner. 4. Certified property survey. 5. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 6. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 7. Change of door locks to Owner's access. 1.07 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Before starting the Work, schedule a meeting with the Owner, Architect and others as necessary to review phasing of the Work. B. Submit a list of key individuals, the superintendent and other personnel at the site, with addresses and telephone numbers where they can be contacted. C. No building utility, or protection service shall be disrupted without prior knowledge and consent of the Owner. D. Work shall be accomplished between 8 a.m. and 6 p.m., Monday through Friday and 9 a.m. through 1 p.m. on Saturday. Work required at any other time is to be arranged in advance and approved by the Owner. 1.08 PROJECT MEETINGS A. The Contractor shall schedule and administer project meetings at least once every two weeks to review progress of the Work, status of the construction schedule, submittals, pending changes and substitutions, and other items affecting progress of the Work. B. The Contractor shall prepare agenda, preside at meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies to participants, the Architect and Owner, and to others affected by the decisions made. 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit product data, shop drawings, and samples to Architect in ample time to permit review and resubmitted in order to meet the Contract time schedule. Delays caused by failure to promptly submit shop drawings and samples shall not be cause for extension of completion date. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP General Requirements 01 00 00 - 6 1. Accompany each submittal with a completed transmittal/submittal coversheet. Include project name, Contractor, supplier or fabricator. Identify material or product, and note any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents. a. A copy of the transmittal/submittal coversheet is included at the end of this Section. 2. Review all material and stamp with approval prior to submittal to the Architect. 3. Submittals made without the Contractor's stamped approval, complete identification, or transmittal/submittal coversheet will be returned to the Contractor for correction. 4. The Architect will review and return shop drawings and samples within a reasonable time after receipt. 5. The Architect will not accept facsimile (FAX) submittals. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Submit shop drawings in the form of a reproducible transparency. 2. Submit five (5) copies of product data and schedules of standard manufactured items. 3. Shop drawings shall show subject work in detail. Show contiguous work by other trades for proposed relationship and transition. 4. Do not fabricate or install work until the Architect has reviewed shop drawings. Work shown on shop drawings marked "Amend As Noted" may be fabricated at the Contractor's discretion. 5. Do not use reproducibles of Contract Drawings for shop drawings. C. Samples: 1. Samples submitted shall show the full variation of color, type, size, finish, and texture of the materials. 2. Material furnished for the project which are not equal to or which show excessive variation of finish from previously submitted samples shall be immediately removed from the Project and replaced. 3. The Architect will not assume responsibility for the return of samples. 1.10 TESTING A. The Owner will pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform inspections, tests and other services required by the Specifications except as noted below. 1. Contractor will bear the expense of failed tests, including re-tests as required to obtain approval. B. The Contractor shall employ and pay for an independent agency to perform inspections, tests and similar quality control services, specified in individual Specification Sections and required by governing authorities, except where they are specifically indicated to be the Owner's responsibility, or are provided by another identified entity. 1. Contractor will bear the expense of failed tests, including re-tests as required to obtain approval. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP General Requirements 01 00 00 - 7 1.11 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Basic Contract definitions are included in the General Conditions of the Contract. B. Terms such as "directed", "requested", "authorized", "selected", "approved", "required", and "permitted" mean "directed by the Architect", and similar phrases. However, no implied meaning shall be interpreted to extend the Architect's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. C. The term "approved", where used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the duties and responsibilities of the Architect as stated in General and Supplementary Conditions. Such approval shall not release the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill Contract requirements unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. D. The term "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work, whether lawfully imposed by authorities having jurisdiction or not. E. The term "furnish" is used to mean "supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations." F. The term "install" is used to describe operations at project site including the actual "unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations." G. The term "provide" means "to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use." H. Specification Content: These Specifications use certain conventions for style of language and the intended meaning of certain term, works, and phrases when used in particular situations. 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words implied, but not stated, shall be interpolated, as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The Contractor shall perform requirements expressed in the imperative mood. At certain locations in the text, subjective language is used for clarify to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. I. Installer: 1. An "Installer" is the Contractor or an entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or sub-subcontractor, for performance of a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 2. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP General Requirements 01 00 00 - 8 3. The term "experienced", when used with the term "Installer" means having a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the precautions required, and having complied with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. J. Project Site: Space available to the Contractor for performance of construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other construction activities as part of the Project. 1. The extent of the Project Site is shown on the Drawings. K. Testing Laboratories: A "testing laboratory" is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. L. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." 1.12 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Water Service: The Owner will provide, maintain and pay for costs of operating water system. 1. Contractor shall install distribution piping for service during the construction period. B. Electric Power Service: The Owner will provide maintain and pay for costs of electric power service. 1. The Contractor shall install temporary power distribution system, disconnects, extension cords and wiring devices of sufficient size, capacity and power characteristics to accommodate performance of work during the construction period. 2. The Contractor shall provide temporary lighting in all work areas to meet or exceed standards required by O.S.H.A. C. Telephones: The Contractor shall arrange for the local telephone company to install temporary service to the Project. Install a pay phone for the convenience of personnel. D. Toilet and Wash Facilities: Contractor may use the Owner's designated toilet and wash facilities during construction. Maintain toilets in a clean and operational condition. Do not use wash facilities for cleaning tools or equipment. E. Toilets: 1. Provide single-occupant self-contained units of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type, properly vented. 2. Units to be fully enclosed with a shell of glass fiber reinforced polyester or similar non- absorbent material. 3. Locate and shield units for privacy. F. Wash Facilities: February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP General Requirements 01 00 00 - 9 1. Install potable-water-supply wash facilities at locations convenient to construction personnel involved in the handling of compounds and materials where wash-up is necessary to maintain a healthy and sanitary condition. 2. Drain and dispose of drainage properly. Supply soap and other cleaning compounds appropriate for each condition. 3. Where recommended or required by governing authorities or recognized standards, provide shower baths, safety showers, eyewash fountains and similar facilities for the convenience, safety and sanitation of construction personnel. G. Drinking Water Fixtures 1. Provide drinking water fountains where and when piped potable water is reasonably accessible from permanent or temporary lines. 2. Otherwise, provide containerized tap-dispenser bottled-water type drinking water units, including the appropriate paper supply. H. Temporary Heat: The Owner will provide, maintain and pay for costs of operating the existing heating system. 1. Contractor shall install distribution piping, ductwork and fans required to distribute heat for service during the construction period. 2. Contractor shall provide temporary heat as needed for performance of the work, for curing or drying and for protection of work from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. 3. Do not use gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander type heating units. I. Temporary Heat: 1. Provide temporary heat where indicated or as needed for performance of the Work, for curing or drying and for protection of work from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. 2. Select heating equipment known to be safe, which will not have a harmful effect upon, completed work or work being installed. 3. Coordinate heating and ventilation to produce required ambient conditions and to minimize the consumption of fuel. 4. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions as required for specific work. Where no minimum is specified, maintain a minimum temperature of 45oF in permanently enclosed portions of the building and areas where finished work has been installed. 5. Except where use of the permanent heating system is authorized, provide vented self- contained LP gas or fuel oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control for temporary heat. 6. Do not use gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander type heating units. J. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary partitions and ceilings where required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing surfaces, fixtures, and equipment. K. Protection of Installed Work: Provide temporary protection for installed products. Control traffic in immediate area to minimize possible damage. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP General Requirements 01 00 00 - 10 L. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire protection needs are fulfilled by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed to adequately protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. 1. Smoking is prohibited in the building. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in recognized fire-safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection facilities, stairways and other access routes for fighting fires. 1.13 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. General: The products, materials and equipment of manufacturers referred to in the Specifications and on the Drawings are intended to establish the standard of quality and design required by Owner and Design Team. B. Product Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, furnish the product indicated. When two or more products or manufacturers are named, furnish one of the products indicated. C. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, furnish products that comply with these requirements, which are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. D. Equal, Equivalent or Comparable Products: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable or equivalent products when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. Samples, if requested. 5. Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. E. Product Substitutions: Substitutions are changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. If Contractor desires to use a substitute item, Contractor shall make written application to Architect within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed, stating and fully identifying the proposed substitute, cost changes, if any, and shall submit substantiating data, Samples, and/or brochures, of the item proposed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect, considering the timing of the application, having regard to the progress of the Work, the period of delivery of the goods concerned and adequate time for Architect’s review. It is Contractor’s responsibility to provide sufficient evidence by tests or other means to support any request for approval of substitutions. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP General Requirements 01 00 00 - 11 1. The burden of proof that a proposed substitution is equal to a specified item shall be upon Contractor, who shall support its request with sufficient test data and other means to permit Architect and Owner to make a fair and equitable decision on the merits of the proposal. 2. Contractor warrants that any substitution shall be physically installable within surrounding work. Any decision regarding acceptance or rejection of a proposed substitution shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for compliance with all the requirements of Contract Documents. If changes in other parts of the Work or the work of other separate contractors are required by its substitutions, Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any such changes including the cost of all design and redesign services related thereto incurred by Architect and their consultants. Contractor’s warranty provided elsewhere hereunder shall apply equally to any approved substitutions. F. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each substitution request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: 1. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. 2. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. 3. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 4. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. 5. Samples, where applicable or requested. 6. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. 7. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. 9. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. 10. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. 11. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. G. Delivery, Storage, & Handling: Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP General Requirements 01 00 00 - 12 2. Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing. 3. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction. 4. Store products, subject to damage by the elements, above ground and under cover, in a weathertight enclosure with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. H. Product Warranties: Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. I. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1.14 INSTALLATION STANDARDS A. Place the work in correct position and, unless specifically called for otherwise, build and install parts of the work level, plumb, and square. B. Paint aluminum embedded in masonry or in contact with dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. C. Inspect each product upon delivery and again immediately before installation. Do not install damaged or defective products, materials, or equipment. 1.15 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Establish a system for daily collection and disposal of waste materials from construction areas and elsewhere on the Project site. Enforce requirements strictly. B. Remove and legally dispose of all rubbish, debris, and damaged material. Do not allow trash and combustible materials to accumulate in the Building or on the site. Do not hold collected materials at the site longer than seven days. 1. Do not bury or burn waste materials on the site. 2. Do not wash waste materials into sewers or waterways. C. Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and dispose of them legally. Do not use Owner's dumpsters for disposal of waste or building materials. D. Handle waste materials that are hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary, separately from other inert waste by appropriate containerizing. E. Provide rodent-proof containers conveniently located on each floor level to encourage depositing of garbage and similar wastes by construction personnel. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP General Requirements 01 00 00 - 13 1.16 CLEANING, MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION A. During handling and installation of products at the Project site, clean and protect the work in progress, as well as the adjoining work, as part of a continuing maintenance program. B. Clean each element at the time of installation. Apply protective coverings on installed work, where required to protect from damage or deterioration, up to Substantial Completion and acceptance of the Work. C. Adjust and lubricate operable components of equipment installed. D. After painting operations have begun in an area, do cleaning only with commercial vacuum cleaning equipment. Do not use brooms. E. Cover existing carpeting and floor finishes to remain to prevent damage and soiling during selective demolition. Install temporary partitions to contain dust from adjacent areas not included in the renovation area. F. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt and debris caused by selective demolition. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition. 1.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. C. Do not cut or penetrate the existing roof surface for any mechanical or electrical construction, which could expose the building interior to water damage or interfere with building occupancy. If any cutting or penetrating of roof membrane is required, the Contractor shall notify the Architect prior to any commencing any work. D. Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage adjoining elements, to minimize noise and vibration in the occupied structure. Use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. E. Do not perform welding operations or use cutting torches inside the building. F. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and finishing. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP General Requirements 01 00 00 - 14 1.18 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT A. Substantial Completion: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete. 3. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 4. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents. 5. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities; include occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. 9. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements. 10. Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finished. B. Final Clean-Up and Repair: 1. Remove remaining temporary construction, excess material and equipment. 2. Remove waste, foreign matter, and debris resulting from construction, from the building areas and the site. 3. Restore material, property and construction damaged by construction personnel and equipment during performance of the Work. 4. In addition to removal of debris and cleaning included in other Sections, clean exposed-to- view surfaces of the Work. 5. Clean and renovate permanent products and systems used to provide temporary services and facilities during construction. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Replacing air filters and cleaning the inside of ductwork and housings. b. Replacing significantly worn parts and parts that have been subject to severe operating conditions. c. Replacing lamps in the lighting system that are burned out or noticeable dimmed. 6. Remove temporary protection and labels, which are not required to remain. 7. Replace damaged or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. 8. For air handling units used during construction, clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils of units operated without filters. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP General Requirements 01 00 00 - 15 C. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of completion, submit the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. Final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. 2. Certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. 4. Certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and that the list has been endorsed and dated by the Architect. 5. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion, or when the Owner took possession of and responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 6. Consent of surety to final payment. 7. Evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 1.19 RECORD DOCUMENTS D. Maintain a set of Construction Documents separate from those used for construction. Clearly identify it as the Record Set and keep it current. 1. Record on the Drawings information on construction-in-place, which varies from the Contract Document data. 2. Carefully locate hidden and underground utilities, as they are uncovered or as installed. Record locations from permanent structures. E. On completion of the project, transfer data from the field Record Drawings to a fresh set of prints, which will be provided by the Architect. 1. Submit the prints to the Architect for review. 2. Upon approval by the Architect, reproduce the prints onto a set of mylar reproducible prints and deliver to the Owner, along with reviewed record set. PART 2 - PRODUCTS [Not Used] PART 3 - EXECUTION [Not Used] END OF SECTION February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP General Requirements 01 00 00 - 16 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Selective Demolition 02 41 19 - 1 SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Selective demolition as shown on Drawings 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building. 2. Utility removals, capping, and relocations. 3. Salvage of existing items to be stored, reused or recycled. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for preconstruction photographs taken before selective demolition operations. 2. Division 01 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 3. Division 01 Section "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 4. MEP documents for coordinating MEP demolition and removals. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove, Salvage, and Re-install: 1. Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. 2. Prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where and when indicated. C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For demolition firm and professional engineer. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following; 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 3. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of egress. 4. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building. 5. Items to be removed and reinstalled, and items to be removed and salvaged. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Selective Demolition 02 41 19 - 2 C. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, and for dust control and noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. D. Pre-demolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins in accordance with Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation". E. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. F. Disposal: Provide evidence of proper disposal of existing light fixtures including T12 fluorescent lamps and magnetic lighting fixture ballasts in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. G. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements under Division 01 Section “Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 6. Review the requirements for temporary bracing of structural walls. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Building will [may] be occupied. Conduct selective demolition so Building operations will not be disrupted B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Building Management as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Selective Demolition 02 41 19 - 3 D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Existing Warranties: Verify with Owner's Representative if any existing warranties are in effect for materials and/or equipment that may be affected by selective demolition operations. 1. Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. 2. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout. PART 2 – PRODUCT 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings and preconstruction photographs. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Selective Demolition 02 41 19 - 4 G. Progress Surveys: Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 3. Cover and protect equipment. 4. Cover and protect connecting stairs. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. 3.03 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Demolish, remove, demount and disconnect abandoned mechanical materials and equipment indicated to be removed and not indicated to be salvaged or saved. 2. Demolish, remove, demount and disconnect inactive and obsolete piping, fittings and specialties, equipment, ductwork, controls, fixtures and insulation. Services and sections of services rendered obsolete shall be removed. Do not abandon them in place. 3. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems shall be removed with removal of the wall. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe, duct, or conduit. 4. Piping and ducts embedded in floors, walls and ceilings may remain if such materials do not interfere with new installations. Remove materials above accessible ceilings. 5. Removal, repair or replacement of material and equipment shall include associated items such as supports, fastenings, concrete equipment pads, conduits, flashings, adhesive, etc. C. Repairs or Replacements: The work specified herein shall also include repair or replacement to existing systems, wherever such systems are disturbed or otherwise damaged during the execution of work as specified. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Selective Demolition 02 41 19 - 5 D. Disposal and Cleanup: Remove from the site and legally dispose of demolished materials and equipment not indicated to be salvaged, not required for reuse, nor shown to be reset or relocated. 3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 2. Proceed with selective demolition systematically in order as determined. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 3. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 4. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 5. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Legally dispose of demolished items and materials promptly off-site. B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.05 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove. C. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be patched in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. See Division 07 Roofing Sections for roofing repair requirements. 1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Selective Demolition 02 41 19 - 6 2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate. D. Removal of Sealant: Remove cured sealant with stiff scrapers. Remove remaining sealant using a low VOC commercial stripper in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions. Rinse areas thoroughly with clean, clear water, and allow to dry. Repeat process until concrete surface is clean enough to receive new sealant. E. Tile Flooring: Remove floor tiles, grouts, mortars, and adhesives according to recommendations of Tile Council of North America (TCNA). Do not use solvent-based products to remove adhesives. F. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings". Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers. 1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI. G. Carpet and Carpet Tiles: Remove carpet, carpet tiles and adhesives according to recommendations of the Carpet and Rug Institute. Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers. H. Acoustical Panel Ceilings and Grid: Remove existing ceiling panels and grid in accordance with industry standards. Remove grid at the joints. Do not cut grid. 3.06 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 1 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for: a. Countertops. b. Mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Miscellaneous structural steel for: a. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. b. Metal angles at duct penetrations through gypsum board partitions. c. Channels, plates, angles, and other miscellaneous steel work. 3. Miscellaneous steel straps, angles, and clips as required for anchoring building components to the structure. 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. 5. Cutting, fitting, drilling and tapping work of this Section to accommodate work of other sections as required for attaching and installing work of this Section. B. Related Requirements: 1. Architectural Drawings for structural-steel framing system components. 2. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry”. 3. Division 06 Section “Interior Architectural Woodwork” for casework, lavatories, and reception desks. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 2 C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel". 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel". 3. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum". 4. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel". 5. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance of Ladders: Ladders, including landings and safety cages, shall withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 3 D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 2.02 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. B. Steel: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992. 3. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170), unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed. 4. Hot-Rolled Sheet: ASTM A 1011 Steel /A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205), unless another grade is required by design loads. 5. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500. 6. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. 7. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. C. Stainless Steel: 1. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 2. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. 3. Shapes: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or 316. 4. Square Tubing (Seamless): ASTM A 511, Type 304. 5. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304. 6. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M,Grade TP 304. D. Aluminum: 1. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6. 2. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6. 3. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6. 4. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F. E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) with continuous slot complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Material: Cold-rolled steel complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230); 0.0966-inch (2.5-mm) minimum thickness; hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 4 3. Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA- 4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. 2.03 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. B. Fastening Devices: Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required. 1. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 2. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3 (ASTM A 325M, Type 3); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3 (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3); and, where indicated, flat washers. 3. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as required. 4. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489. 2. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M). 3. Nuts and Bolts: ASTM A307. 7. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). 8. Lock Washers: FS FF-S-84, helical spring type carbon steel. 9. Wood Screws: FS FF-S-111, flat head carbon steel. 10. Plain Washers: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1. C. Anchorage Devices: 1. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 2. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. a. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. 3. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. a. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 5 b. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy [Group 1 (A1)] [Group 2 (A4)] stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). 4. Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. a. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. b. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. C. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Available Products: a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19. b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. c. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313. d. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. e. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. f. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20, and compatible with topcoat. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. F. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications. G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 6 1. Euclid Chemical Company; “NS GROUT”. 2. Laticrete International, Inc.; “L&M™ DURAGROUT™”. 3. BASF Group (Master Builders); "MasterFlow 713" or “Sonneborn Sonogrout”. 4. Oldcastle Architectural Inc.; “Sakrete Non-Shrink Construction Grout”. 5. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; "CG-86 Grout". H. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal- weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated. 2.05 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Shear, cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. 1. Reinforce and tap metal fabrications to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. 2. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 3. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. 1. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. 2. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. D. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. G. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 7 2.06 METAL TRIM AND FABRICATIONS A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. 1. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. 2. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. B. Metal Fabrications: 1. Elevator Wall Panels “MTL-1”: 1/8 inch stainless steel with #4 Brushed Finish. 2. Lavatory Supports: Steel Channels or Tubes; mitered and welded at corners. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Supports: Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed. C. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide the following framing and supports;. 1. Bent plates, steel plates, bent angle frames and all other miscellaneous iron work, except framing forming a part of the structural steel work. Drill all holes required to secure metal, wood and other materials to the framing. 2. Bent Plate at Canopy: 1/2 inch thick bent steel plate; painted. 2.08 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. 3. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 8 C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC- SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning". 2. Items Indicated to Receive Primers: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning". 2. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning". D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. E. Powder-Coat Finish for Interior Steel: Prepare, treat, and coat nongalvanized ferrous metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Treat prepared metal with iron-phosphate pretreatment, rinse, and seal surfaces. 3. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less than 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). 4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Stainless Steel: Bright, Directional Satin No. 4 Finish. 1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. 2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. 3. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 2.09 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 1. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 9 B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.02 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 10 53 - 1 SECTION 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for installation of rough carpentry and related work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. B. Section Includes: The work of this section shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Wood blocking, nailers, furring and grounds. 2. Plywood backing panels and concealed plywood. 3. Anchors, fasteners and rough hardware required to erect, apply and install the work of this section. C. Related Requirements: 1. Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications”. 2. Division 06 Section “Interior Architectural Woodwork”. 3. Division 08 Section “Access Doors”. 4. Division 10 Section “Toilet Accessories”. 5. Division 10 Section “Fire Protection Specialties”. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's latest published literature for materials specified herein and obtain approval before materials are delivered to the job site. B. Certificates: Submit the following certificates to show compliance with the specifications. Obtain approval prior to delivery of materials. 1. Material Certificates: Where dimensional lumber is provided to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses, submit listing of species and grade selected for each use, and submit evidence of compliance with specified requirements. Compliance may be in form of a signed copy of applicable portion of lumber producer's grading rules showing design values for selected species and grade. Design values shall be as approved by the Board of Review of American Lumber Standards Committee. 2. Wood Treatment Data: Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installation and finishing of treated material. a. Pressure Treatment: Include certification by treating plant stating chemicals and process used, net amount of salts retained and conformance with applicable standards. b. Fire Retardant Treatment: Include certification by treating plant that treatment material complies with governing ordinances and that treatment will not bleed through finished surfaces. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 10 53 - 2 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. B. Lumber grades shall conform to the grading rules of the Association having jurisdiction and shall bear the official grade and trademark of the Inspection Bureau of the Association and a mark of mill identification. Moisture content of rough lumber shall not exceed 19 percent. Treated lumber shall be marked and certified by processor. C. Certificates: Materials and work requiring certificates, whether specified herein or required by authorities having jurisdiction, shall be submitted for approval. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store lumber and plywood on the site and in stacks to insure drainage and free air circulation. Cover stacks with tarpaulins or other watertight covering. Store grounds and similar small sized lumber inside the building as soon as possible after delivery. B. Store materials in a dry location off the ground, in such a manner as to prevent damage or intrusion of foreign matter. Materials which have become damaged or otherwise unfit for use during delivery, or storage, shall be replaced at no additional expense to the Project PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.02 WOOD PRODUCTS A. General: 1. Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with DOC PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. 2. Grade Stamps: Factory-mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 3. Sizes: Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by DOC PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. 4. Dressed Lumber: Provide dressed lumber S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Moisture Content: Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches (50 mm) or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber: 1. General: Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes shown. 2. Grades: Lumber of grades identified of any species that provides the required grades. a. Non-Load Bearing Interior Partitions and Framing: No. 2 or Construction grade dimension lumber. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 10 53 - 3 b. Blocking and Nailers used for Attachment of other Construction: Select and cut dimension lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. c. Blocking and Nailers not used for Attachment of other Construction: Stud, Utility, or No. 3 grade dimension lumber. d. Furring and Stripping: Select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and or damage to paneling. C. Plywood: 1. Plywood Standards: Plywood shall comply with DOC PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood panels and, for products not manufactured under DOC PS 1 provisions, with American Plywood Association (APA) "Performance Standard and Policies for Structural-Use Panels", Form NO. E445. 2. Plywood Markings: Factory mark each panel with APA trademark evidencing compliance with applicable grade requirements. 3. Concealed APA Performance Rated Panels: Where construction panels will be used for the following concealed types of applications, provide APA Performance-Rated Panels complying with requirements indicated for grade designation, exposure durability classification and thickness. 4. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED INT with exterior glue, in thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 23/32 inch. 5. Thickness: Provide thickness as needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than the thickness indicated on the Drawings. 2.03 PRESERVATIVE TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: Insect and decay treated lumber shall be pressure process impregnated with a water borne preservative in accordance with requirements of the American Wood Preservers Association AWPA U1 and the following Use Categories: 1. Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground. 2. Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground. 3. Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. B. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. D. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 10 53 - 4 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.04 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Fire retardant treated wood shall be pressure process impregnated in accordance with requirements of the American Wood Preservers Association Standard for the specific wood to be treated, shall conform to applicable codes and ordinances and shall meet the Fire Hazard Classification requirements of codes and ordinances. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire- retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 3. Fire retardant treatments shall not contain monoammonium phosphate or diammonium phosphate. 4. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 5. Manufacturer: Hoover Treated Wood Products or approved equal. C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread rating of 25 or less and smoke-developed rating of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 1. For panels 3/4 inch thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: density, 45-lb/cu. ft; modulus of rupture, 1600 psi; modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi; internal bond, 80 psi; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 lbf and 225 lbf, respectively. 2. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Duraflake FR" by Willamette Industries, Inc. D. Fabrication: There shall be no fabrication of the material after treatment, such as cutting, shaping, or grooving for splines or ring connectors so as to expose untreated surfaces, except that the material may be cut to length, shaped, or grooved if the exposed surfaces or edges are tightly butted against other material that is noncombustible or that is fire retardant treated, so that no untreated wood is left exposed to danger of ignition. Holes may be bored or cut for plumbing or heating pipes and for electric outlets only if the openings are covered with tightly-fitted noncombustible escutcheons or cover plates. The allowable working stresses of the material shall be 90 percent of the allowable stresses for untreated lumber of like classification. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 10 53 - 5 E. Application: 1. Concealed blocking. 2. Roof blocking. 3. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in connection with roofing. 4. Plywood backing panels. 2.05 ROUGH HARDWARE A. General: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, spikes, expansion shields, bolts, nuts, washers, strap irons, and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommending nails. 1. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dip zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A153. B. Furnish to the masonry trade, anchors, bolts, wall plates corrugated wall plugs, nailing blocks, wood, etc., which are required for the fastening and installation of carpentry work attached to masonry. C. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. D. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. E. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. F. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. G. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). H. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563(ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. I. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, for interior applications. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 10 53 - 6 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Rubberized-Asphalt Isolation Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross- laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch (1.0mm). 1. "CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashings"; Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing. 2. "Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing"; Grace Construction Products, a unit of W.R. Grace & Co. 3. "No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing"; Heckmann Building Products Inc. 4. "Textroflash"; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. B. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness of the work required under this Section. B. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. 3.03 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION/ERECTION A. Carpentry includes lumber and fastenings necessary for the connection to other work, including drilling and tapping of steel. B. Provide materials and labor for erecting and maintaining protection around the work of other trades. C. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. D. Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other work. E. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. F. Separate preservative treated wood from all metals, including metal decking, with rubberized- asphalt isolation flashing. Apply flashing to wood prior to installation. G. Wood Treatments: February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 10 53 - 7 1. Lumber used in conjunction with sheet metal shall be pressure preservative impregnated, unless required by building code to be fire retardant. 2. Field treat cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood to comply with AWPA M4. 3. Interior wood shall be fire-retardant treated. H. Wood Nailers, Blocking, Furring and Grounds: 1. Provide wood nailers, blocking, furring, curbs, bucks, and grounds required for the work of the various Sections of these specifications, unless otherwise specified. 2. Wood for nailers, blocking, furring and grounds shall be of sufficient number, size and fastenings to support the work properly. Secure members with approved type anchors of fastenings not to exceed 2 feet (610 mm) o.c. shimmed plumb, level and true. 3. Install plywood linings of plywood material specified herein, at telephone electrical closets and where indicated. 4. Blocking shall be as required for the proper installation of the finished work and for items in various sections as required. Blocking, edgings, stops, nailing strips, etc., shall be continuous, unless distinctly noted otherwise. Provide blocking as required to install equipment. 5. Fastening for wood grounds, furring and blocking shall be of metal and of type and spacing suited to conditions. Hardened steel nails, expansion screws, toggle bolts, self-clinching nails, metal plugs, inserts or similar fastenings shall be used, of suitable type and size to draw the members into place and securely hold same. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Keep the premises in a neat, safe, and orderly condition during execution of this portion of the work, free from accumulation of sawdust, cut-ends, and debris. B. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. C. Protect miscellaneous carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 1 SECTION 06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Interior Architectural Woodwork including, but not limited to, associated wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation; 1. Architectural Casework: a. Plastic-laminate clad cabinets. b. Solid-color laminate clad cabinets. c. Cabinet hardware. 2. Countertops: a. Solid surface b. Plastic laminate 3. Interior Standing and Running Trim a. Wood door frames and jambs. b. Wood bases 4. Wood Fabrications: a. Copy Print room b. Mothers room c. Pantry d. Reception 5. Shop priming and finishing of interior architectural woodwork. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for concealed supports for woodwork. 2. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 3. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealants at joints. 4. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors” to match veneers from the same flitches for both flush wood paneling and flush wood doors. 5. Division 11 Section “Pantry Equipment” for pantry appliances and equipment. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 2 C. Coordination: Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that exterior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated 1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" to fabricator of architectural woodwork. Coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination". 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated including cabinet hardware and accessories, and finishing materials and processes. 1. Wood-Preservative Treatment: Include data and warranty information from chemical- treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical-treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material and manufacturer's written warranty. 2. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Include data and warranty information from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 3. Waterborne Treatments: For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 4. Adhesives: Manufacturer’s product data for adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content and material safety sheets. 5. Composite Wood Materials: Manufacturer's product data indicating that products contain no added urea-formaldehyde (NAUF) resin. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full-size. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for audio/visual components and other items installed in architectural woodwork. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 3 C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and finish specified, in manufacturer's or fabricators standard size. D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. 1. Thermoset decorative overlays. 2. Plastic laminates. 3. PVC edge materials. 4. Each type of hardware. E. Samples for Verification: 1. Lumber for Transparent Finish: Not less than 5 inches (125 mm) wide by 24 inches (600 mm) long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 2. Veneer Leaves: Representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent- finished interior architectural woodwork. 3. Wood-veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified. 4. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for panels, for each finish system and color, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished. 5. Plastic-laminate-clad panel products, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 6. Thermoset decorative-overlay surfaced panel products, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 7. Solid-surfacing and quartz composite materials, 6 inches (150 mm) square. 8. Stone countertop material, 6 inches square. F. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Data: For fabricator demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 2. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 3. Evaluation Reports: For preservative-treated and fire-retardant-treated wood materials, from ICC-ES. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production and installation of interior architectural woodwork [including flush wood paneling, wood casework, and wood doors faced with veneers from same flitches as paneling]. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 4 D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated or required, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior architectural woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. B. Finish Operations: Do not deliver interior architectural woodwork until painting and similar finish operations that might damage woodwork is completed in installation areas. Store woodwork in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified. C. Field Measurements: Where interior architectural woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Established Dimensions: Where interior architectural woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 5 A. Urea-Formaldehyde Resins: The following products shall contain no added urea-formaldehyde (NAUF); 1. Composite Wood/Engineered Wood. 2. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF). 3. Plywood. 4. Agrifiber products. 5. Laminating adhesives. 2.02 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED-WOOD MATERIALS A. Preservative-Treated-Wood Materials: Provide with water-repellent preservative treatment complying with AWPA N1 (dip, spray, flood, or vacuum-pressure treatment). 1. Preservative Chemicals: 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate (IPBC), combined with a compatible EPA-registered insecticide. 2. Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material from untreated material. B. Extent of Preservative-Treated Wood Materials: Treat interior architectural woodwork in contact with concrete or masonry. Items fabricated from the following wood species need not be treated: 1. Redwood or all-heart redwood. 2. Western red cedar or all-heart western red cedar. 3. White oak. 4. African mahogany. 5. Honduras mahogany. 6. Ipe. 7. Dark red meranti. 8. Teak. 2.03 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED WOOD MATERIALS A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. 1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 6 B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. 2. For items indicated to receive a stained, transparent, or natural finish, use organic resin chemical formulation. 3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire- test-response characteristics, using a woodworking shop certified by testing and inspecting agency. 4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork. C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke- developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 1. For panels 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi (11 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi (2070 MPa); internal bond, 80 psi (550 kPa); and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf (1100 and 1000 N), respectively. 2. For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches (20 to 32 mm) thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1300 psi (9 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi (1720 MPa); linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 175 lbf (1100 and 780 N), respectively. D. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard (MDF) panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke- developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. 2.04 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of interior architectural woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Products: 1. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. 2. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches (76 mm) wide. 3. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. C. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: 1. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 7 2. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for density. 3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay. 4. Marine Grade Plywood: AB Marine Grade Fir Plywood; clear and smooth, exterior glue with no voids between plys. 5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1. 6. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. D. Hardwood Products: 1. Wood Veneer for Transparent Finish “WD-1 and WD-2”: American Black Walnut by Dodge Veneers, flat cut to match Architect’s sample. 2. Solid Wood for Opaque Finish: P-grade Poplar or any closed-grain hardwood. E. Thermoset Decorative Overlay (Melamine): Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M- 2, or medium-density fiberboard complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, with surface of thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. Provide either the named product in the Finish Schedule, or equivalent products as manufactured by one of the following. 1. “Solicor”, as manufactured by Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. 2. “Nevamar”, as manufactured by Panolam Industries International, Inc.; Nevamar. 3. “Coorcore 2”, as manufactured by Formica Corporation; Formica® Laminate. 4. “Zeroback Technology”, as manufactured by Richelieu; Zerobact Technology, Harmony Panel, Supermat finish. 5. “Armored protection”, as manufactured by Nevamar 6. Ober® groupe; Oberflex® Genuine Wood Veneers. G. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA- 2 of colors, textures, and patterns as identified in the Finish Schedule. 1. Manufacturers: a. Pont de Nemours and Company“; Corian. 2. Thickness: 3/4 inches (19 mm). 3. Surface Finish: As indicated on the “Finish Schedule”. a. Refer to Finish Schedule. 4. Composition: Natural quartz composite. 5. Thickness: As indicated on the “Finish Schedule”. 6. Surface Finish: Polished. H. Provide Wood Bases in accordance with Performance requirements: as indicated on Finish Schedule. I. Match Architect’s approved samples. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 8 2.05 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber where required, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Z Clips: “Monarch Z Clips” as manufactured by Monarch Metal Fabrications or approved equal. 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Projection: 1/4 inches unless otherwise required on the Drawings. 3. Lift-Off Height: 1/4 inches, 3/8 inches or 5/8 inches as required by project conditions. 4. Lengths: 1-1/2 inches to 12 feet as required by project conditions. C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. D. Adhesives and Glues: Do not use adhesives and glues that contain urea formaldehyde. Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. 2.06 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware". B. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA numbers or items referenced to this standard. C. Cabinet Hardware: 1. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of opening, [self-closing,] unless otherwise indicated. 2. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), five-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- (2.4-mm) thick metal. 3. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long by 5/16 inch diameter. 4. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. 5. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141 unless otherwise indicated. 6. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081 7. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9; B04013, metal, single or two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip. 8. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9; Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full- extension type; zinc-plated-steel, ball-bearing slides. a. For drawers not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1HD-100. b. For drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1HD-200. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 9 c. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1HD-100. d. For trash bins not more than 20 inches (500 mm) high and 16 inches (400 mm) wide, provide Grade 1HD-200. 1. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121, cam locks. 2. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041, cam locks. 3. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011 4. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch square brushed stainless steel. D. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Brackets: BHMA A156.9. 1. Heavy-Duty Commercial Grade Standards” by Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company. Standards: “85 Series. 2. Brackets: “185 Series Heavy-Duty Commercial Grade Brackets” by Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company. E. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated and as selected by Architect and indicated on Drawings. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. F. Concealed Hardware Finishes: Provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.07 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species and Cut: 1. Species “WD-1”: American Black Walnut. 2. Cut: Flat cut. 3. Provide split species on frames and jambs that face areas with different wood species, matching each face of woodwork to species and cut of finish wood surfaces in areas finished. C. For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. 2.08 WOOD CASEWORK FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS)" for grades of architectural wood cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Construction Type: Type A (Frameless). 3. Interface Style: Style 1 – Flush Overlay. B. Wood for Exposed Surfaces: February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 10 1. Species and Cut: “WD-1”. 2. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. C. Semi-exposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Same species and cut indicated for exposed surfaces. 2. Drawer Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: Solid-hardwood lumber, stained to match species indicated for exposed surfaces. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. D. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued dovetail joints. E. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops. 2.09 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS)" for grades of architectural wood cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Construction Type: Type A (Frameless). 3. Interface Style: Style 1 – Flush Overlay. B. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard. 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. 4. Edges: Grade HGS, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. 5. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. C. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge banding. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. D. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL. E. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued dovetail joints. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 11 F. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops. G. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces as indicated on the “Finish Schedule”. 2.10 SOLID-SURFACING COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS)" for grades of architectural wood cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Front Edge: Self-edge (square edge). B. Solid-Surfacing-Material: As indicated on the Drawings. C. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges, and field-applied backsplashes unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing 2.11 RECEPTION DESK A. Grade: Premium. B. Fabricate as shown on the Drawings and the approved Shop Drawings. 2.12 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING A. Grade: Custom. B. Shelving for Transparent Finish: 3/4-inch (19-mm) solid [red oak] [lumber to match species indicated for other types of transparent-finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building unless otherwise indicated] [Match species indicated for door to closet where shelving is located]. 1. Shelf Cleats: 3/4-by-3-1/2-inch (19-by-89-mm) boards, of same materials indicated above for interior lumber trim for transparent finish. 2. Finish: Transparent finish in accordance with Shop Finishing Article below. C. Closet Rods: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter, satin stainless steel rod with matching flanges. D. Shelf Supports: Floating Shelf Support Rods as specified herein. 2.13 FABRICATION A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 12 B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas C. Fabricate interior architectural woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) unless otherwise indicated. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm). D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times interior architectural woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on approved Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. E. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. F. Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber: Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. G. Stairs: Cut rough carriages to accurately fit treads and risers. Glue treads to risers, and glue and nail treads and risers to carriages. 1. House [wall] [and] [face] stringers and glue and wedge treads and risers. 2. Fabricate stairs with treads and risers no more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from indicated position and no more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) out of relative position for adjacent treads and risers. 2.14 SHOP PRIMING A. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing interior architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces. B. Interior Architectural Woodwork for Opaque Finish: Shop prime with one coat of wood primer as specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting". February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 13 2.15 SHOP FINISHING A. General: Finish interior architectural woodwork with transparent finish at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing interior architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of interior architectural woodwork. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: System - 12, water-based polyurethane. 3. Staining: None required. 4. Sheen: As selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Condition interior architectural woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing interior architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install interior architectural woodwork to comply with same AWI grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble architectural woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install architectural woodwork level, plumb, true in line, and without distortion. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut architectural woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor architectural woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with interior architectural woodwork. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 14 1. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. F. Preservative-Treated Wood: Where cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends and drilled holes according to AWPA M4. G. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork. H. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 48 inches (1220 mm) long except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. 1. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 2. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler; sand smooth; and finish same as wood base if finished. 3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). I. Cabinets: Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) using concealed shims. 1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. as follows: a. Wood Framing: No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips b. Metal Framing: No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. J. Paneling: Install level and plumb, true in line, and without distortion. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). Install with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch (1.6 mm in 2400-mm) vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) horizontal variation from a true plane. 1. Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips. Do not use face fastening unless otherwise indicated. 2. Shim paneling as required with concealed shims. 3. For flush paneling with revealed joints, install with variations in reveal width, alignment of top and bottom edges, and flushness between adjacent panels not exceeding 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). K. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of interior architectural woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 15 1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are shop applied. L. See Division 09 Section "Interior Painting” for final finishing of installed interior architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective interior architectural woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace interior architectural woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean interior architectural woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop- applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Through-Penetration Firestop Systems 07 84 13 - 1 SECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Penetration firestop systems through the following fire-resistance-rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items: 1. Walls and partitions. 2. Horizontal assemblies. 3. Smoke barriers. 4. Construction enclosing compartmentalized areas. 5. Replace missing firestopping. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 07 Section “Cementitious Fireproofing” for fireproofing of structural steel and metal decking. 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction, and in smoke barriers. 3. Division 07 Section “Building Perimeter Firestopping” for joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections. 4. Division 07 Section “Expansion Control” for fire-resistive architectural expansion joint systems. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of penetration firestop system product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each penetration firestop system, show each kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency applicable to each penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items. 2. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration to suit a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire- resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Through-Penetration Firestop Systems 07 84 13 - 2 C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire- resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of penetration firestop system products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain penetration firestop systems for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Through-Penetration Firestop Systems 07 84 13 - 3 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestop systems. C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations. D. Do not cover up penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each installation. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Compatibility: Provide penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. Provide FM Approved systems and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:. a. Penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. [Penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to penetration firestop system designations of FM Approved system.] C. Mineral or Glass fiber Insulation: Mineral fiber firestopping materials exposed to supply or return air plenums, or located above suspended ceilings, must be encapsulated or fully sealed to prevent direct exposure of the mineral or glass fibers to the plenum. Where sealants are used to encapsulate the fibrous materials (e.g., smoke sealants used at firestopping joints), the sealants shall meet the requirements of Division 01 Section “Indoor Air Quality Management”. 2.02 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items. 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. Grace Construction Products. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Through-Penetration Firestop Systems 07 84 13 - 4 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. NUCO Inc. 7. Passive Fire Protection Partners. 8. RectorSeal Corporation. 9. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI) 10. 3M Fire Protection Products. 11. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 12. USG Corporation. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa). 1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa). 1. F-Rating: At least one-hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. 3. W-Rating: Penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa). 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening at and no more than 50-cfm (0.024-cu. m/s) cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) at both ambient and elevated temperatures. F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Products with flame-spread ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450 per ASTM E 84, and are approved by local authorities having jurisdiction for all locations and conditions of use for the Project. Provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, both during and after construction. 1. Piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems: Moisture-resistant penetration firestop systems. 2. Floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic: Firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads by installing floor plates or other means. 3. penetrations involving insulated piping: Penetration firestop systems that do not require removal of insulation. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Through-Penetration Firestop Systems 07 84 13 - 5 G. Accessories: Components for each penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Article on "Performance Requirements". Use only components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials: a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 2.03 FILL MATERIALS A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture. C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet. E. Intumescent Putties: Non-hardening, dielectric, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. G. Box Inserts: Intumescent insert designed for installation inside outlet and switch boxes in fire- rated assemblies. H. Mortars: Prepackaged, dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable, heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Through-Penetration Firestop Systems 07 84 13 - 6 J. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. K. Silicone Sealants: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces. 3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces. 2.04 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestop systems. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Through-Penetration Firestop Systems 07 84 13 - 7 C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. 1. Apply firestopping to existing openings and openings resulting from construction operations. B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words: "Warning--Penetration Firestop System--Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect penetration firestop systems and to prepare test reports. 1. Inspecting agency will state in each report whether inspected penetration firestop systems comply with or deviate from requirements. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Through-Penetration Firestop Systems 07 84 13 - 8 B. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued. C. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce penetration firestop systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Joint Firestopping 07 84 46 - 1 SECTION 07 84 43 JOINT FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Fire-resistive joint systems for the following applications; 1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions: a. Floor-to-floor joints. b. Floor-to-wall joints. c. Head-of-wall joints. d. Wall-to-wall joints. 2. Joints in smoke barriers. 3. Replace missing, and repair existing firestopping damaged during demolition and new construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 07 Section "Cementitious Fireproofing" for fireproofing of structural steel and metal decking. 2. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for systems installed in openings in walls and floors with and without penetrating items. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system, show each kind of construction condition in which joints are installed; also show relationships to adjoining construction. Include fire-resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for construction and penetrating items. C. Qualification Data: For Installer. D. Evaluation Reports: Evidence of fire-resistive joint systems' compliance with ICBO ES AC30, from the ICBO Evaluation Service. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fire-resistive joint system. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Joint Firestopping 07 84 46 - 2 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire- resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer experienced in installing fire-resistive joint systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire-resistive joint system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-resistive joint systems, for each kind of joint and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project and with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems. C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations. D. Do not cover up fire-resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector of authorities having jurisdiction have examined each installation. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Joint Firestopping 07 84 46 - 3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-resistance tests shall be performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and comply with the following: a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency. 2.02 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Joint Firestopping: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint firestopping systems are installed. Joint firestopping systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases. B. Acceptable Manufacturer’s: Subject to compliance with requirements, fire-resistive joint systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. DAP Inc. 2. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. 3. Instant Firestop Mfg. Inc. 4. International Protective Coatings Corp. 5. Isolatek International. 6. Nelson Firestop Products. 7. NUCO Industries. 8. RectorSeal Corporation (The). 9. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI) 10. 3M Fire Protection Products. 11. United States Gypsum Company. C. Joints in and between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide systems with assembly ratings equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance ratings of the construction that they join, indicated as determined by approved systems, with ratings determined by ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079. 1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor, or roof in or between which it is installed. D. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide joint firestopping systems with rating determined per ASTM E 2307. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Joint Firestopping 07 84 46 - 4 1. F-Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor assembly. E. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079 with L-Rating not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft (0.00775 cu. m/s x m) of joint at 0.30 inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures. F. Exposed Joint Firestopping Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84 and in addition are approved by the local authorities having jurisdiction for all locations and conditions of use for the Project. Provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, both during and after construction. G. Joint Firestopping Systems in Floor: Provide products that are water resistant. H. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates or damaging adjoining surfaces. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Joint Firestopping 07 84 46 - 5 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect fire- resistive joint systems and prepare inspection reports. B. Testing Services: Inspecting of completed installations of fire-resistive joint systems shall take place in successive stages as installation of fire-resistive joint systems proceeds. Do not proceed with installation of joint systems for the next area until inspecting agency determines completed work shows compliance with requirements. 1. Inspecting agency shall state in each report whether inspected fire-resistive joint systems comply with or deviate from requirements. C. Remove and replace fire-resistive joint systems where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. E. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and fire-resistive joint systems comply with requirements. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Joint Firestopping 07 84 46 - 6 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire- resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire- resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 1 SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Joint sealers and related work as indicated on the drawings and schedules and specified herein for the following: 1. Sealants for exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces. 2. Sealants for exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 3. Sealants for interior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces. 4. Sealants for interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 5. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 08 Doors, Storefront and Entrances, Curtain Wall and Window Sections. 2. Division 08 Section “Glass Glazing”. 3. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for sealing joints in sound rated construction. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealing Compounds. B. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. D. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. E. ASTM D105 6 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. F. ASTM D1565 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open-Cell Foam). G. ASTM D1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed-Cell Foam). H. ASTM D2628 - Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for concrete Pavements. I. ASTM C 1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing For Use With Cold Liquid Applied Sealants. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 2 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation including required primers, temperature and humidity limits, color availability and cure time. B. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Submit a Schedule of Joint Sealers to be used for the project. Include interior and exterior sealants applied in the field and, where appropriate, applied in the shop. For each sealant listed, include sealant type, applicable substrates, and sealant number (as indicated in the specification). C. Samples: Submit three (3) samples, 6-inch long illustrating sealant colors for selection. D. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. 2. Product Certificates: From sealant manufacturer, certifying compatibility of sealants and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the sealant such as air barriers. 3. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 4. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article. 5. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, recommended backer rods, and requirements for curing. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five (5) years documented experience, and approved by manufacturer. D. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field-test their adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 2. Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. 3. Test joint sealants by hand-pull method test or methods recommended in ASTM C 1193. 4. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 3 5. Sealant joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other shall be tested in accordance with this Section. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site with Contractor, Architect, sealant manufacturer, sealant contractor, wall cladding contractor, curtain wall and window contractor to discuss sealant locations, colors, installation procedures, compatibility of sealants with substrates, co-ordination between trades and scheduling. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered to the site, in original unopened containers, clearly indicating manufacturer's name, brand name, and other identifying information. B. Materials shall be stored in a dry location, off the ground and in such a manner as to prevent freezing, damage and the intrusion of foreign matter. C. Materials which have become damaged or otherwise unfit for use during delivery, or storage, shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturers. 2. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation where joint widths are less than allowed by the joint sealant manufacturer for the application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. D. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. General: Warrantees shall include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve watertight seal, discolor, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. B. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 4 C. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period - Urethanes: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period – Non-Sag Silicones: Twenty years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Warranty Exclusions: Warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide elastomeric joint sealants, with proper industry standard aspect ratios, and that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food; provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. F. Exposed Joint Sealant Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.02 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS A. High Performance Silicone Sealants: Silicone, One part, neutral cure; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, with movement capability of –50/+50%, Exposure Use NT; Substrate Use G, M, A and O; ASTM C 1184 for structural silicone sealants. 1. Dow Corning Corporation; “Dow Corning 795 Silicone Building Sealant”. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 5 2. GE Silicones, Momentive Performance Materials; “SilPruf SCS2000”. 3. Pecora Corporation; “Pecora 895NST”. 4. Sika Corporation; “SikaSil-C 995”. 5. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company: “Spectrem 2”. 6. Color as selected by Architect, including standard and custom colors. B. General Silicone Sealants: Silicone, single component non-acid curing; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, with movement capability of –50/+100%, Uses T, NT, M, G, A and O. Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials, UL 263 (ASTM E 119). 1. Dow Corning Corporation; “Dow Corning 790 Silicone Building Sealant”. 2. GE Silicones, Momentive Performance Materials; “SilPruf SCS2700”. 3. Pecora Corporation; “Pecora 890NST”. 4. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company; “Spectrem 1”. 5. Color as selected by Architect, including standard and custom colors. C. Expansion Joint Sealants: Pre-compressed expanding foam sealant with integral low-modulus silicone coating. Provide one of the following: 1. Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd.; “Colorseal”. 2. Approved equal. D. Metal Lap Joint Sealants: Butyl or Polyisobutylene, non-drying, non-skinning, non curing; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M, A, and O. Provide one of the following: 1. Bostik USA, an ARKEMA Company; “Chem-Calk 300”. 2. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company; “Tremco Butyl Sealant”. 3. Approved equal. E. Horizontal Traffic Joint Sealants: Self-leveling polyurethane, two-part; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Uses M and O with shore A hardness of 30-40. Provide one of the following: 1. Bostik USA, an ARKEMA Company; “Chem-Calk 550”. 2. Pecora Corporation; “Urexpan NR 200”. 3. Sika Corporation; “Sikaflex 2c SL”. 4. Master Builders Solutions, a BASF Construction Chemicals division; “MasterSeal SL 2”. 5. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company; “Vulkem 455SL”. 2.03 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANT A. Paintable Joint Sealants: Acrylic Latex, one-part, non-sag, mildew resistant; ASTM C834, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M, G, and A. Provide one of the following: 1. Tremflex 834, as manufactured by Tremco Inc. 2. AC-20 Silicone, as manufactured by Pecora Corporation B. Sanitary Sealants: Silicone, single component, mildew-resistant, Type M, Grade NS, ASTM C 920, Class 25, for sanitary applications. 1. Tremsil 200, as manufactured by Tremco Inc. [BULLETIN NO. 2] February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 6 C. Single-Component, Nonsag, Non-Staining, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT; SWRI validated. 1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Spectrem 1. D. Single-Component, Nonsag, Non-Staining, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT; SWRI validated. 1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Spectrem 2. E. Single-Component, Nonsag, Non-Staining, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant [SJS#__]: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Spectrem 3. F. Multi-Component, Nonsag, Non-Staining, Field-Tintable Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Spectrem 4-TS. G. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant [SJS#__]: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Tremsil 200 Sanitary. H. Single-Component, Nonsag, Moisture-Cure, Polyurethane Joint Sealant [UJS#__]: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT; Greenguard certified. 1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Dymonic 100 I. Smooth Polyurethane one component sealant; non-sag, gun grade, paintable after full cure. 1. Basis of Design Product: Sherwin Williams J. Preformed Foam Joint Seals [PS#2]: Manufacturer's standard preformed, pre-compressed, open- cell foam seal manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. (160 kg/cu. m), impregnated with water-repellent agent. Provide factory-produced pre-compressed sizes selected to fit joint widths; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive. 1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco Inc., Illmod 600. [BULLETIN NO. 2] 2.04 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type, size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 7 C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Joint widths shall be designed for anticipated movement but shall be a minimum of 3/8 inches wide. B. Perform installation in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. C. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. D. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 8 E. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated. F. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. G. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. H. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. I. Tool joints concave unless otherwise indicated. J. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface. K. Compression Gaskets: Avoid joints except at ends, corners, and intersections; seal all joints with adhesive; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field-test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate. 2. Perform one test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation. 3. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method or tests recommended in ASTM C 1193. 4. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field adhesion test log. 5. Inspect tested joints and report on whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively, whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free from voids, and whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. 6. Record test results in a field adhesion test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 7. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used to originally seal joints. B. Evaluation of Field-Test Results: Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 9 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. A. Protection: Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 23 - 1 SECTION 08 11 23 INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior hollow metal doors and frames. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealing around perimeter of hollow metal frames. 2. Division 08 Section ”Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 3. Division 08 Section “Glazing” for glass in doors and sidelights. 4. Division 09 Sections “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for placing anchors for hollow metal work into metal frame construction. 5. Division 09 Sections “Interior Painting” for painting requirements. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, label compliance, fire-resistance rating, and finishes for each type of steel door and frame specified. B. Shop Drawings: In addition to requirements below, provide a schedule of hollow-metal doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles. 4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections. 7. Details of glazing frames and stops showing glazing. 8. Details of conduit and preparations for electrified door hardware and controls. C. Qualification Data: For Installer. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive fire tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow-metal door and frame. E. Samples for Verification: For the following items, prepared on Samples about 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm) to demonstrate compliance with requirements for quality of materials and construction: 1. Doors: Show vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; core construction; and hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement. Include separate section showing glazing if applicable. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 23 - 2 2. Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include separate section showing fixed hollow metal panels and glazing if applicable. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. C. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. 2. Do not use non-vented plastic. B. Store doors and frames under cover at Project site. Place units in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Avoid using non- vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. 1. If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. 2. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. B. Anchorages: Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated. 1. Test Pressure: Test at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C [and FM approved]. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 23 - 3 2. Temperature-Rise Rating: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. 3. Smoke and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 4. [Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.] B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. C. Vision Glass Standard: Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: 1. FGMA "Sealant Manual" and "Glazing Manual". 2. GTA "Engineering Standards Manual". 3. SDI 118-05 “Basic Fire Door Requirements”. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 2.03 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet. 1. General: Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and welded face corners and seamless face joints, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Sidelights and Transoms: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Frames for Fire-Rate Doors: Provide three sided gasketing as per NFPA 105 and UL 10C. C. Interior Single Rabbet Frames: “EzyJamb Single Rabbet - SRC” door jamb system by EZ Concept US. 1. Material: 18 gauge galvanneal steel, one-piece with perforated flanges. 2. Depth: Suitable for 1-3/4 inch thick doors, and applicable partition thickness. 3. Fire Rating: Up to 90 minutes; Intertek listed. D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as frames to comply with the following minimum sizes: February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 23 - 4 1. Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch (3.0 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 6 inches (152 mm) longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds. 2. Pivots: Minimum 0.167 inch (4.2 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 6 inches (152 mm) longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds. 3. Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) thick. 4. All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) thick. E. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet. F. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick. 3. Compression Type for Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. G. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. H. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. 2.04 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces and vertical edges, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI A250.8. 1. Design: Seamless flush panel. 2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). 3. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 4. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames”. B. Interior Doors: SDI A250.8, Level 2, complying with the following requirements: 1. Physical Performance: Level B (Heavy Duty) according to SDI A250.4. 2. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 1008; minimum thickness of 0.042 inches (1.0 mm). 3. Edge Construction: Model 2 (Seamless). 4. Core: Manufacturer’s standard core. Kraft-paper honeycomb core is not allowed. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 23 - 5 C. Fire-Rate Doors: SDI A250.8, Level 2, complying with the following requirements: 1. Physical Performance: Level B (Heavy Duty) according to SDI A250.4. 2. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 1008; minimum thickness of 0.042 inches (1.0 mm). 3. Edge Construction: Model 2 (Seamless). 4. Core: Comply with NFPA to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated. 5. Automatic Door Bottoms: Provide fire-rated automatic door bottom and fire-rated door sweep. 6. Gasketing: Provide fire-rated gasketing for meeting stiles at pairs of doors. D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as door face sheets to comply with the following minimum sizes: 1. Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch (3.0 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 6 inches (152 mm) longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds. 2. Pivots: Minimum 0.167 inch (4.2 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 6 inches (152 mm) longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds. 3. Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) thick. 4. All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) thick. 2.05 BORROWED LITES A. Fabricate of uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm). B. Construction: Full profile welded. C. Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as metal as frames. D. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2.06 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated. 1. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: a. Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) in height. b. Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) in height. c. Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) in height. d. Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof more than 120 inches (3048 mm) in height. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 23 - 6 2. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: a. Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) in height. b. Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) in height. c. Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) in height. d. Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof more than 96 inches (2438 mm) in height. e. Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. 3. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. 4. Post-installed Expansion Type: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer. Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c. B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor. Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. C. Floor Anchors for Concrete Slabs with Underlayment: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch (51-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at top of underlayment. 2.07 MATERIALS A. Steel for Door and Frame Fabrication: Steel shall contain a minimum of 25 percent (by weight) recycled content, calculated by adding the post-consumer recycled content percentage to one- half of the post-industrial recycled content percentage. 1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. 2. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. 3. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 (ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating designation. 4. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating; mill phosphatized. B. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. D. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal door frames of type indicated. E. Grout: Comply with Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry". February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 23 - 7 F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. (96- to 192-kg/cu. m) density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50 respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4- mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.08 GLAZING A. Non-Rated Glazing: Fully tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1048 as specified in Division 08 Section “Glass Glazing”. B. Fire-Rated Glazing: “Keralite Select L” as manufactured by VETROTECH Saint Gobain NA; or equal by Technical Glass Products (TGP). 1. Laminated Ceramic Glazing Material: Proprietary Category II safety glazing product in the form of 2 lites of clear ceramic glazing material laminated together. 2. Thickness: 5/16-inch (8-mm) nominal thickness. 3. Weight: 4.5 lb/sq. ft. (22.0 kg/sq. m). 4. Approximate Visible Transmission: 80 percent. 5. Finish: Polished on both surfaces. 6. Fire-Rating: Fire rating as indicated on the Door Schedule; tested in accordance with NPFA 252. 7. Impact Safety Resistance: ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR1201 (Cat. I and II). 8. STC Rating: Approximately 35 dB. 9. Labeling: Permanently label each lite with a permanent logo including the name of product, manufacturer, testing laboratory (UL), fire rating period, and safety glazing standards. 10. Warranty: Five years from the date of Substantial Completion. C. Glazing Stops and Moldings: 1. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. 2. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed. 2.09 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate hollow-metal doors and frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 23 - 8 2. Sidelite and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by welding. 3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Plaster Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames installed in concrete or masonry. 5. Door Silencers: Drill stops to receive door silencers except on weather-stripped doors. Provide plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. C. Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch (0.66 mm), steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches (152 mm) apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches (127 mm) o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation. 2. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection [and temperature-rise] ratings indicated. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3.2 mm in 51 mm). 4. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. 5. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors[ where required for attachment of weather stripping] with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 6. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency. 7. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements. 8. Stiffeners: Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware". 1. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 3. Fabricate hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 23 - 9 E. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints. 1. Provide stops and moldings flush with face of door, and with square stops unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal doors and frames. 4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 5. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each corner. F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of door or frame. 2. Provide fixed frame moldings on secure side of interior doors and frames. 3. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of doors and frames. 4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. G. Door Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency. H. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 3/8-inch-thick by 2-inch- (9.5-mm-thick by 50-mm-) wide steel. I. Plaster Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016-inch (0.4-mm) thick. 2.10 METAL FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Finish hollow-metal door and frames after assembly. B. Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning"; remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel; comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning", or SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning". C. Factory Applied Interior Paint Finish: Acrylic system by Tnemec company, Inc. or approved equal. 1. Primer: “Series 115 Uni-Bond DF” 2. Topcoat: “Series 1029 Enduratone”. 3. Finish Color: As indicated on the “Finish Schedule” or as selected by Architect. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 23 - 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of hollow- metal doors and frames. 1. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of hollow- metal frame connections before frame installation. 2. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace hollow- metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. B. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed. C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Provide doors and frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install hollow- metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. b. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 23 - 11 c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. e. Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. f. Apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with mortar, grout, and plaster containing antifreezing agents. 2. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80. 3. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated on the Shop Drawings. 4. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Install grout in lifts and take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. 6. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout or mortar as specified in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry". 7. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to supporting construction above, unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. 8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Hollow-metal Doors: Comply with SDI A250.8. a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glass Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 23 - 12 3.04 TOUCHUP, ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer. B. Factory-Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Cleaning: Clean grout and other bonding material off hollow-metal doors and frames immediately after installation. END OF SECTION February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 1 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-Fire rated solid core flush doors. 2. Rated and non-rated vision panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware” for door hardware for flush wood doors. 2. Division 08 Section “Glass Glazing” for glass in flush wood doors. 3. Division 09 Section “Interior Painting” for field painting of factory primed doors. 4. Division 26 Section "Electrical" for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for security control systems and door controls and operators. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for each type of product, including the following; 1. Door core materials and construction. 2. Door edge construction 3. Door face type and characteristics. 4. Rated and non-rated glazing. 5. Door trim for openings. 6. Door frame construction. 7. Factory-machining criteria. 8. Factory-[priming] [finishing] specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for wood doors. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each type of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following; 1. Door schedule indicating door location, type, size, fire protection rating, and swing. 2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware, lite and louver cutouts, and glazing thicknesses. 3. Details of frame for each frame type, including dimensions and profile. 4. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems. 5. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment. 6. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 7. Clearances and undercuts. 8. Requirements for veneer matching. 9. Doors to be factory primed and application requirements. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 2 C. Samples: Submit samples of each type of door specified showing construction, finish, color and specular gloss selected. Samples shall be 12 inch by 12 inch (305 mm by 305 mm) corner section. Submit samples of acoustical hardware accessories. D. Informational Submittals: 1. Field quality-control reports. 2. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. E. Closeout Submittals: 1. Special Warranties. 2. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and number to which door accesses. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Package prefinished doors and panels in heavy duty cartons at the factory prior to shipment, suitable to protect doors against damage during handling, transit and storage. Mark units with identification for proper location corresponding to the Contract Document door number/location identifications. Doors shall remain in cartons until hanging. B. Do not deliver materials in wet weather. Arrange for delivery to coincide with building management operations. Do not upon delivery, pile units directly on concrete slabs or floors without providing ample supports holding them at least 6 inches (150 mm) above slabs or floors. Do not store in basement or subgrade spaces unless temperature and humidity requirements of the manufacturer are strictly adhered to. Store in a dry place, protected from the weather. Stack in accordance with manufacturer's directions. C. Do not deliver wood doors until painting, wet work, taping and spackling of gypsum board, and similar operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate wood doors, have been completed in installation areas. Store wood doors only in areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupants for the remainder of construction period. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Delamination in any degree. 2. Warp or twist of 1/4” or more in any 42-by 84 inch section of door. 3. Telegraphing of stile, rail or core in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3 inch span. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 3 B. Warrantee Period: Life of the installation for solid-core interior doors. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Wood Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire- protection ratings indicated on Drawings, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing in accordance with UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. C. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C), and the fire-resistance rating in minutes. D. Vision Glass Standard: Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: 1. FGMA "Sealant Manual" and "Glazing Manual". 2. GTA "Engineering Standards Manual". E. Composite Wood/Engineered Wood, Medium Density Fiberboard, Plywood, Agrifiber Products and Laminating Adhesives: No added urea-formaldehyde (NAUF) resins. 2.02 INTERIOR WOOD DOORS A. Wood Door Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc/ Marshfield Door Systems; a Division of Masonite International Corporation. 2. Eggers Industries: a. For fire rated doors with wood frames provide Eggers doors and jambs. b. For fire rated door pairs provide Eggers doors with no metal edge conditions B. Veneer-Faced Solid-Core Wood Doors for Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Performance Duty Level: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A. a. Heavy Duty: Offices, hallways, storage rooms, apartment entry doors, stairwells, and mechanical service doors. b. Extra Heavy Duty: Bathrooms, classrooms, assembly areas, hotel/motel entry. c. Standard Duty: Closet doors. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 4 3. Species and Cut:”WD-1” as indicated on the “Finish Schedule”.. 4. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails shall be bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. Faces shall be bonded to core using a hot press. C. Door Frames: 1. Wood Frames: As specified in Division 06 Section “Interior Architectural Woodwork”. 2. Metal Frames: As specified in Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 2.03 MATERIALS A. General: Materials shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications and industry standards listed below and specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: 1. AWI "Quality Standards, Section 1300, Architectural Flush Doors, Premium Grade". 2. NWWDA "Wood Flush Doors Standard NWWDA I.S.1". 3. ANSI "Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood ANSI/HPMA HP". B. Particle Board Cores: Single thickness slab of 3 ply particle board complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or LD-2, hot pressed with synthetic resin glue. 1. Density: Average density between 28 and 32 pcf. 2. Linear Expansion: Shall not exceed 0.03% in either direction when tested in accordance with ASTM D1037, Sections 76 through 79. 3. Faces: Shall be of 0.010 inch thick flakes, with resin content a minimum of 50% higher than core resin content. Face layer density shall be a minimum of 25% higher than core density. 4. Exit Devices: Provide doors with glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices. C. Mineral-Cores: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standards and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated. D. Top and Bottom Edge Bands: Thoroughly kiln dried hardwood, free from defects which will be visible when finished as specified herein. E. Blocking: Manufacturer's standard designed for purpose intended. F. Crossbands: Minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick after sanding, properly dried hardwood. G. Adhesives: 1. Type I Adhesive: CS35, Type I (fully waterproof bond). 2. Type II Adhesive: CS35, Type II (water-resistant bond). H. Primer: Alkyd type primer sealer as standard with door manufacturer. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 5 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: Manufacture doors in accordance with AWI, WMAC, and "Architectural Woodwork Standards”. B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 2. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors. C. Door Hardware: Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 1. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. 2. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates. 3. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 4. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors. 5. Electrified Locksets: For doors scheduled to receive electrified locksets, provide factory- installed raceway and wiring to accommodate specified hardware. D. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glass Glazing". 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. E. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. 1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails. 2. Provide factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames. 3. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. F. Non Fire Rated Doors: 1. Core: Solid particleboard. 2. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 3. Vertical Stiles: Minimum 1-3/8 inch (35 mm) wide after trimming, 2 ply construction without fingerjoints, consisting of 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick outerband (specie matching or compatible with face veneer) and 3/4 inch (20 mm) thick mill option hardwood innerband. 4. Top and Bottom Rails: Minimum 1-3/8 inch (35 mm) wide after trimming, 2 ply construction without fingerjoints. 5. Crossbands: Full width of door with grain running horizontally, tapeless spliced without voids. 6. Face Veneer: As specified above, laminated to crossband and edges. 7. Bonding: February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 6 a. Core to stiles, rails and blocking: Type II adhesive. b. Face veneers and crossbands to core and edges: Type I adhesive by hot plate process. 7. Blocking at Particleboard-Core Doors: Provide wood blocking as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware: a. 5-inch (125 mm) top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. b. 5-inch (125 mm) bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor plates. c. 4-1/2-by-10-inch (114-by-250-mm) lock blocks. d. 5-inch (125 mm) midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices. G. Fire Rated Doors: 1. Core: Incombustible, asbestos-free mineral composition, engineered to meet labeling requirements. 2. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 3. Vertical Stiles: Provide balanced construction by furnishing stile edge screw holding reinforcement to both vertical stiles as standard with the manufacturer and complying with the following: a. Stile edge screw withdrawals when tested in accordance with ASTM D1037 shall exceed 740 pounds. b. Stile edge split resistance when tested in accordance with ASTM D143 (modified) shall exceed 750 pounds. 4. Top and Bottom Rails: Top rails minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide after trimming, bottom rails minimum 2 inch (50 mm) wide after trimming with finger joints. Provide additional reinforcing as required by specified hardware. 5. Crossbands: Full width of door with grain running horizontally, tapeless spliced without voids. 6. Face Veneer: As specified in Art. 2.01, laminated to crossband and edges. 7. Bonding: Manufacturer's standard to achieve specified rating. 8. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as follows: a. 5 inch (125 mm) blocking at top rail for surface door closers. b. 5-inch (125-mm) bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates. b. 5 inch by 18 inch (125 mm by 450 mm) blocking for locksets. c. 4-1/2-by-10-inch (114-by-250-mm) lock blocks. d. 5-inch (125 mm) midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices. 9. Category A Doors: Furnish doors with integral intumescent seals. 10. Category B Doors: Provide three sided gasketing for frames as per NFPA 105 and UL 10C. 11. Bottoms for Fire-Rate Doors: a. Provide fire-rated automatic door bottom and fire-rated door sweep. b. Provide fire-rated gasketing for meeting stiles at pairs of doors. H. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw- holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 7 I. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing." a. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies. 2.05 PREFITTING AND PREMACHINING A. Prefit doors and panels in accordance with tolerance requirements of Commercial Standard CS 171 and AWI at the place of manufacture. Provide standard bevel or radius to edges of doors as required by the installation. B. Machine doors and panels for hardware requiring cutting of the doors at the place of manufacture. Machining shall be in accordance with hardware templates, final hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings. 2.06 FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on edges of cutouts and mortises. 2. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish. 3. Factory prime doors to receive an opaque finish. Field apply finish coating. B. Transparent Finish Doors: Comply with applicable provisions and requirements of AWI, Factory Finishing, 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: System 12; Water-based polyurethane. 5. Sheen: As selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Verify that tile, stone and all wet work is completed and dried in the areas to receive doors. 3. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 8 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors in accordance with NFPA 105. B. Conditioning: Doors shall be conditioned to the average prevailing moisture (humidity) of the locality before hanging. Doors shall not be subjected to abnormal heat, dryness, moisture or humidity. Avoid sudden changes in temperature such as forced heat (used to dry out the building). C. Factory-Fitted Doors: 1. Alignment: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 2. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. D. Job-Fitted Doors: 1. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below. Do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. 2. Machine doors for hardware using hardware templates. 3. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 4. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. 5. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. 6. Clearances: a. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. b. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. c. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. d. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. E. Door Hardware: Apply door hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's instructions and division 08 Section "Door Hardware". Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearance at head and jambs, and to contact stops uniformly. Remove and replace doors which are found to be warped, bowed or otherwise damaged and cannot be properly fitted in frames. 1. Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearance at head and jambs, and to contact stops uniformly. 2. Remove and replace doors which are found to be warped, bowed or otherwise damaged and cannot be properly fitted in frames. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 9 B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect doors and hardware during construction. Marred finishes shall be touched-up to perfectly match adjacent surfaces to the satisfaction of the Architect or unit shall be replaced. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Access Doors and FramesPanels 08 31 00 - 1 SECTION 08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall access doors and frames. 2. Fire-rated wall access doors and frames. 3. Ceiling access doors and frames. 4. Installation of access doors furnished by others. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 22 Plumbing Sections. 2. Division 23 HVAC Sections. 3. Division 26 Electrical Sections. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide for each type of product. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include floor plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Provide reflected ceiling plans if access doors are to be mounted in ceilings. 2. Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. 3. Method of attaching door frames to surrounding construction. C. Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule specified in "Submittals" Article. B. Coordination: Coordinate the location of access doors with other fixtures and devices to be located in walls and ceilings. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Access Doors and FramesPanels 08 31 00 - 2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are labeled and listed by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for fire-rated access door assemblies installed vertically. 2. NFPA 288 for fire-rated access door assemblies installed horizontally. B. [Mineral or Glass fiber Insulation: Mineral fiber firestopping materials exposed to supply or return air plenums, or located above suspended ceilings, must be encapsulated or fully sealed to prevent direct exposure of the mineral or glass fibers to the plenum. Where sealants are used to encapsulate the fibrous materials (e.g., smoke sealants used at firestopping joints), the sealants shall meet the requirements of Division 01 Section Indoor Air Quality Management.] 2.02 WALL ACCESS DOORS A. Source Limitations: Obtain doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Manufacturers: Access doors are based on products as manufactured by Karp Associates, Inc. unless noted otherwise. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the specified product or equivalent products by one of the following: 1. J. L. Industries, Inc. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 3. Milcor Doors; Hart & Cooley, Inc. C. Non-Rated Access Doors: Model “KDW” flush drywall access door as manufactured by Karp Associates, Inc., of the following construction: 1. Steel Gauge: 16 gauge steel frames and 14 gauge steel doors. 2. Drywall Bead: Galvanized steel. 3. Hinges: Concealed, continuous piano hinge. 4. Latch: Key operated cylinder lock with automatic dust shutter. 5. Finish: Prime coat of rust inhibitive electrostatic powder, baked grey enamel. D. Fire Rated Access Doors: Model “KRP-350FR” flush fire-rated access door for walls as manufactured by Karp Associates, Inc., or approved equal by one of the following: 1. Fire Ratings: UL 1-1/2 hour “B” label in walls, Warnock Hersey 3 hour rating in ceilings. 2. Frame: 16 gauge steel, 1 inch wide, with galvanized drywall bead. 3. Door: 20 gauge steel, welded pan type filled with 2 inch thick fire-rated insulation, self- latching with automatic closer and interior latch release. 4. Hinges: Concealed, continuous piano hinge. 5. Latch: Key operated cylinder lock. 6. Finish: Prime coat of rust inhibitive electrostatic powder, baked grey enamel. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Access Doors and FramesPanels 08 31 00 - 3 2.03 DROP-IN CEILING ACCESS DOORS Provide one of the following: A. Drop-In Gypsum Access Doors for Ceilings: “Stylemark Drywall Ceiling Access Doors” as manufactured by InterSource Specialties Company, or approved equal. 1. Design: Square with smooth round edges. 2. Construction: Glass fiber reinforced gypsum frame with drop-in access door. B. Access Doors for Gypsum Ceilings: “Stealth Access Doors” by Wind-Lock (distributed by Chicago Metallic Corp.) 1. Description: GFRC, prefabricated with high-density gypsum, reinforced with continuous random filament glass fiber mat and structural reinforcing as required. 2. Glass Content: 5 to 6 percent by weight. 3. Density: 103 to 112 pcf. 4. Shell Thickness: 1/8 to 3/16 inch (3 to 5 mm) nominal. 5. Flammability: Flame Spread Index of 0. 6. Smoke Development Index of 0. 7. Flexural Strength: 300-4000 PSI. 8. Compressive Strength: 7600 PSI. 9. Hardness (Barcol): 50. 10. Impact Resistance: 8.0 ft.-lb./in. 11. Machined radius and edge trims. 2.04 MATERIALS FOR STEEL ACCESS DOORS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, and surface defects; pickled and oiled; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified nominal thickness according to ASTM A 568/A 568M. C. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified nominal thickness according to ASTM A 568/A 568M. Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet, complying with ASTM A 591/A 591M, Class C coating, may be substituted at fabricator's option. D. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board. 2.05 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. Size to be determined as per location. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Access Doors and FramesPanels 08 31 00 - 4 C. Steel Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 1. Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches wide around perimeter of frame. 2. For trimless frames with drywall bead for installation in gypsum board assembly, provide edge trim for securely attached to perimeter of frames. 3. Provide mounting holes in frames to attach frames to metal or wood framing in drywall construction and to attach masonry anchors in masonry construction. Furnish adjustable metal masonry anchors. D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish. 2.06 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Surface Preparation: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes: Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 2. Factory Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat. D. Gypsum Access Panels for Ceilings: Coordinate with painting of gypsum board ceilings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install access doors in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Access Doors and FramesPanels 08 31 00 - 5 B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Install access doors with trimless frames flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. D. All access panel locations in Noise Critical Spaces shall be installed only where indicated on drawings. Location of additional proposed access panels shall be submitted by Contractor for approval. E. Install fiber glass reinforced gypsum ceiling panel in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Glazing 08 80 00 - 1 SECTION 08 81 00 GLASS GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Glass glazing requirements for the following applications: 1. Glazed doors, sidelights, and vision panels. 2. Glazed metal and glass partitions. 3. Glass wall panels at elevators. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”. 2. Division 10 Section “Metal and Glass Partitions”. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Where glazing is part of the work specified in other sections of the technical specifications, include glazing submittals with that related work, complying with all requirements specified herein. B. Samples: Submit samples of each type of glass, setting block, face shim, edge block, glazing sealant and gasket. Provide sealant samples 12 inches (305 mm) long installed between samples of the materials to be glazed, fully cured. Samples will be reviewed for color and texture only. C. Manufacturer's Data: Submit the following information from the manufacturer: 1. Statement that each product to be furnished is recommended for the application shown. 2. Complete instructions for handling, storing, mixing, priming, installing, curing and protecting each glazing material. 3. Sealant adhesion test reports. D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for all glazing work. Where glazing is part of other trades or assemblies, submit shop drawings as part of the work. Coordinate with canopy engineering. E. Insulating Glass Certificates: Submit certification that the insulating glass units have been granted the IGCC classification "CBA". F. Guarantees: 1. Guarantee, Insulating Glass (Vertical Application): Submit a 10 year guarantee against material obstruction of vision as a result of dust or film formation on the internal glass surfaces as a result of the failure of the hermetic seal for 10 years. Upon notification of such defects, within the guarantee period make the necessary replacements at the convenience of the Owner. November 1, 2019 Everest RE 100 & 200 Corporate Center Dr., Warren, NJ HLW Project #18033 © 2020 HLW International LLP Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 2 2. Guarantee, Wet Glazing: Submit a written guarantee agreeing to repair or replace sealant compounds which have failed to provide airtight and watertight joints for any reason, or which appear to have failed in adhesion, cohesion, abrasion-resistance, migration-resistance, stain- resistance, general durability or any other form of apparent deterioration (excluding inherent qualities and limitations clearly specified in the manufacturer's data which was submitted). Period of guarantee shall be for five (5) years, and guarantee shall be signed by both the Installer and Contractor. Comply with these specifications for repair and replacement of work. G. Statement of Application: Submit copy of statement signed by the Subcontractor and Contractor, stating that the glazing materials complied with these Specifications and that the installation methods complied with the manufacturer's printed instructions for each condition of use on this Project. H. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish maintenance instructions for each type of glass for use during construction and for use by the Owner after acceptance of the Work. I. Calculations: Submit the following: 1. Thermal stress calculations for each type, size and thickness of exterior glass. 2. Glass manufacturer's substantiating calculations or data showing that the probability of breakage at the design wind pressure will not exceed the specified probability of breakage for each type, size and thickness of exterior glass. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator of insulating glass units shall have a minimum of 5 years’ experience in fabricating units similar to those specified herein on Projects comparable to this project. B. Except as modified by governing codes and the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: 1. FGMA "Sealant Manual" and "Glazing Manual". 2. GTA "Engineering Standards Manual". 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver glass to site in suitable containers that will protect glass from the weather and from breakage. Carefully store material as directed in a safe place where breakage can be reduced to a minimum. Deliver sufficient glass to allow for normal breakage so as not to delay the job process. B. Protect the materials of this section before, during and after installation. Protect installed work and materials of other trades. C. In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and replacement acceptable to the Architect at no additional cost to the Project. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work of this section with the work and requirements of other technical sections of the specifications. Coordination shall include work for mockups as required. B. Do not install glass when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F. November 1, 2019 Everest RE 100 & 200 Corporate Center Dr., Warren, NJ HLW Project #18033 © 2020 HLW International LLP Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," to design glazing. C. Design Criteria: Glass thicknesses shown and heat treatment specified are minimum requirements based upon manufacturer's regularly published literature. The Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy of the literature or the conclusions derived therefrom. Provide glass thicknesses and heat treatment (heat strengthened or fully tempered) as required to meet design criteria specified in Sections “Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall” and "Aluminum Entrances and Storefront" and the following: 1. To limit the statistical probability of failure to eight lights per thousand at design wind pressures. 2. To resist temperature stress breakage. 3. Glass strength (heat treatment) shall be determined by the following loads as follows: a. Interior Glass: An inward and outward load of 5 psf. c. Special Conditions: Provide glass at corner conditions to resists the load of 1.5 times the design negative wind pressure. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness indicated. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). 5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. E. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. 2.02 GLASS MATERIALS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3. B. Heat Treated Float Glass: Comply with ASTM C 1048. 1. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality- Q3. November 1, 2019 Everest RE 100 & 200 Corporate Center Dr., Warren, NJ HLW Project #18033 © 2020 HLW International LLP Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 4 a. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. b. Flexural Strength: Not less than 2 times the strength before treatment and having a surface compression of 5000 psi +/- 1500 psi. 2. Fully Tempered Float Glass: Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. a. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. b. Meet the requirements of ANSI Z97.1. 3. Sizing and Cutting: Prior to heat treating, cut glass to required sizes as determined by accurate measurement of openings to be glazed, making allowance for required edge clearances. Cut and process edges in accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendations. Do not cut or treat edges in the field. 2.03 GLASS FABRICATIONS A. Insulating Glass Units: Use types of glass shown in fabricating insulating glass units. Use quality of glass specified hereinbefore. 1. Provide dual edge-sealed insulating glass units which are certified for the insulating glass seal classification "CBA" by the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) when tested in accordance with ASTM E773 and ASTM E774 (as sponsored by the Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturer's Association). 2. Manufacture: Manufacturers of insulating glass units shall have been in the business of producing units of similar size successfully for not less than ten (10) years. 3. Fabrication: Fabricate units at factory with sheets of glass hermetically sealed at all edges with a permanent elastomeric sealant. Dehydrate entrapped air and provide a desiccant on same side of each light in location as directed by the Architect. a. Dual Edge-Seal: Primary sealant of polyisobutylene. Secondary sealant of 2 component silicone; "3204 Silicone Sealant" (General Electric Co.). b. Fill sealed space with dry air or other dry gas with a dew point not exceeding -50 deg. F. Exclude dirt and other foreign substances. 4. Provide units tested in accordance with the following ASTM test methods. a. E773 Standard Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. b. E774 Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units. c. E546 Standard Test Method for Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. d. E576 Standard Test Method for Dew/Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in Vertical Position. B. Laminated Glass: Comply with ASTM C 1172 for kinds of laminated glass indicated and other requirements specified, including those in the Laminated-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer: Interlayer material as indicated below, clear or in colors, and of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation. Interlayer Material: Polyvinyl butyral sheets. November 1, 2019 Everest RE 100 & 200 Corporate Center Dr., Warren, NJ HLW Project #18033 © 2020 HLW International LLP Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 5 2. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets. 3. Glazed Canopy: The thickness of the glass used for the glazed canopy shall be determined by the engineering of the entire canopy structure. 2.04 GLAZING SEALANTS AND TAPES A. General: 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Materials: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Dry Glazing Materials: Pressure Glazing Gaskets complying with the following; 1. Closed Cell Gaskets: Continuous extruded expanded foam neoprene with a Shore A Durometer hardness of 45 to 55 and profile adequate to fulfill the overall performance requirements specified and complying with ASTM C509, Type II. Provide adhesive on one side. 2. Solid Gaskets: Continuous extruded neoprene with a Shore A Durometer hardness and profile as required to provide pressure adequate to fulfill the overall performance requirements specified and complying with the applicable provisions of ASTM C864. 3. Fully vulcanize gasket corners where compatible with installation procedures. C. Wet Glazing (Sealants): 1. Silicone Sealant: "795 Silicone Rubber Building Sealant" by Dow Corning Corp. Refer to Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”. 2. Exposed surfaces of interior and exterior glazing material shall be color matched. Color of sealant materials shall be selected by the Architect. D. Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. 4. Butyl Glazing Tape Reinforced: A pre-formed, non-sagging, self-adhesive, non-oxidizing, non-staining butyl rubber tape with core reinforcement, by one of the following: a. "Extru-Seal Butyl Rubber Tape" by Pecora Corp. b. "No. 166.6 Elastic Butyl Tape" by Presstite Div. c. "Tremco 440" by Tremco. E. Sealant for Butt-Glazing: Single-Component, Nonsag, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses NT, G, and A. November 1, 2019 Everest RE 100 & 200 Corporate Center Dr., Warren, NJ HLW Project #18033 © 2020 HLW International LLP Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 6 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Setting Blocks: ASTM C864; neoprene blocks, 80 to 90 Shore A Durometer hardness. B. Edge Blocks: ASTM C864; neoprene blocks, 60 to 70 Shore A Durometer hardness. C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. D. Glazing Channels: Extruded aluminum capable of supporting 1/2 inch thick tempered glass; baked on enamel finish. Glass shall be placed into upper channel and dropped down into bottom channel. 1. Top Channel: “U” shaped channel with even legs for receiving 1/2 inch thick glass. 2. Bottom Channel: “J” shaped channel with even or uneven legs for receiving 1/2 inch thick glass. E. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. 2.06 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. General: Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 2. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. B. Butt-Glazing: Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Edges and Corners: Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Comply with recommendations of the Glazing Manual issued by the Flat Glass Manufacturers Association and the approved manufacturers. B. The Contractor shall require sealant manufacturers to provide field instructions and supervision at the start of the work of this Section including supervision of the job mockup. The Contractor shall submit written certification from the sealant manufacturer that the applicators have been instructed in the proper application of their materials. The Contractor shall use only skilled and experienced workmen for sealant installation. November 1, 2019 Everest RE 100 & 200 Corporate Center Dr., Warren, NJ HLW Project #18033 © 2020 HLW International LLP Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 7 C. Clean surfaces to be glazed and prime as recommended by approved manufacturer of glazing material. D. Perform work using mechanics skilled in their trade and execute work in a first class manner. E. Obtain and verify measurements and size of work, accept responsibility for the correct and accurate fit of work. F. Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to installation and do not install glass pieces which have observable edge damage or face imperfections. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install glazing material in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions and guidelines. B. Set glass in a true, plane, tight and straight, with proper bite and adequate clearance, firmly anchored to prevent rattling and looseness, with edges cleanly cut. Do not nip or seam the edges. C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling, installation and operation of the building. D. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away from the glass. Install gaskets protruding slightly out of the channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. E. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations. F. Install gaskets into channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete bond or contact of glass to gaskets and channel surfaces. G. Align stripes and patterns of contiguous glass lights to a tolerance of +/- 1/8 inch (+/- 3.2 mm), non- cumulative, from a reference line, except for units which are installed without mullion framing which shall be installed to an alignment tolerance of +/- 1/16 inch (+/- 1.6 mm), non-cumulative. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer. B. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. C. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass by method recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Final Adjustment: Just prior to acceptance, inspect every door, mirror and glazed opening and make any final adjustments required for proper operation. Contractor shall insure that the whole job is left in perfect condition and working order. November 1, 2019 Everest RE 100 & 200 Corporate Center Dr., Warren, NJ HLW Project #18033 © 2020 HLW International LLP Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 8 3.05 INTERIOR GLASS SCHEDULE A. As specified in Division 10 Section “Metal and Glass Partitions”. END OF SECTION February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Glazing Surface Film 08 87 00 - 1 SECTION 08 87 00 GLAZING SURFACE FILM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following glazing surface films for interior applications: 1. Decorative film on metal and glass partitions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 08 Section “Glass Glazing”. 2. Division 10 Section “Metal and Glass Partitions”. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of decorative film overlay. B. Shop Drawings: Glazing film for office partitions to show locations of different types of patterning, C. Samples: 12 inches (300 mm) square of each type of glazing film mounted on glass. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Maintenance Data: For each type of decorative film overlay to include in maintenance manuals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs installers certified by the manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DECORATIVE GLAZING SURFACE FILM A. Decorative Film “GF-1”: “3M™ Fasara™” decorative window films by 3M Corporation. 1. Pattern: Fine Crystal, White. 2. Material Type: Polyester. 3. Film Thickness: 2.76 – 5.51 mil. 4. Opacity: Translucent. 5. Fire Classification: Class A. B. Color: Refer to Finish Schedule. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Glazing Surface Film 08 87 00 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION OF GLAZING SURFACE FILMS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect decorative glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing, held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect decorative glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 1 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board partitions. 2. Interior gypsum board ceilings and soffits. 3. Tile backing board. 4. Non-load bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 5. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits. 6. Accessories including fasteners, anchors, acoustical sealant, insulation, joint compound and tape, and other accessories as required for installation. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring that supports gypsum board. 2. Division 06 Section “Interior Architectural Woodworking” for wood door frames installed in gypsum board assemblies. 3. Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping”. 4. Division 07 Section "Joint Firestopping" for head-of-wall assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 5. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”. 6. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors” for frames installed in gypsum board assemblies. 7. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies”. 8. Division 09 Section “Tiling” for tiles installed over tile backer boards and for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile. 9. Division 09 Section “Interior Painting” for primers and finishes applied to gypsum board surfaces. C. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for “Standard Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials and Systems”. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's latest published literature for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for Work not illustrated in manufacturers standard literature. Shop Drawings shall include construction and system details, in large scale detail. 1. Submit dimensioned plans for locations of wall, ceiling and soffit control joints. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 2 2. Submit dimensioned plans showing layout and location of each isolation hanger, cold-rolled steel carrying channels, and details of edge conditions where isolated ceiling construction meets or adjoins other construction. Number each isolation hanger and identify on the corresponding vibration Isolation system schedule. C. Samples: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size sample in 12 inch (300 mm) lengths for each trim accessory indicated. 2. Textured Finishes: 12 inch by 12 inch sample for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. D. Certificates: Submit applicable test certificate conforming to requirements of these specifications and authorities having jurisdiction on fire rated assemblies as required. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Industry Standards: Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein, the current edition of industry standards referred to below, apply to work under this Section. Where requirements indicated on the Drawings or Specifications, differ from the industry standards, the more stringent requirements shall govern. 1. Gypsum Association: a. GA-201; Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings. b. GA-216; Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. c. GA-505; Gypsum Board Construction Terminology and Definitions. d. Fire Resistance Design Manual. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. ASTM C11; Gypsum Board Construction Terminology. b. ASTM C645; Specification for non-load (axial) bearing steel studs, runners (track) and rigid furring channels for screw application of gypsum board. c. ASTM C754; Specification for steel framing members to receive screw-attached gypsum board, backing board or water-resistant board. d. ASTM C840; Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. e. ASTM C1002; Specification for steel drill screws for the application of gypsum board. 3. Tile Council of America (TCA) “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" a. TCA: B412 Detail for waterproofing and cement backer board at shower walls and tub enclosures. B. Mockups: Build mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 3 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistant Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E119 by a testing and inspection organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire-resistance-rated assemblies identical to those indicated by reference to design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing and agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspecting agency. C. Horizontal Deflection: Design framing systems in accordance with American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Publication “North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Non-Structural Members”, except as otherwise shown or specified. 1. For wall assemblies, limited to 1/360 [1/240] of the wall height based on horizontal loading of 5 lbf/sq. ft. (239 Pa) [10 lbf/sq. ft. (480 Pa)]. D. Unfaced Fiberglass Batt Insulation: Shall not be used above suspended ceilings. If used in plenums and shafts, fiberglass batt insulation must be encapsulated and formaldehyde-free. Fiberglass board products used in plenums, shafts or for insulating ductwork must be wrapped or enclosed. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 4 2.02 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 2. Marino\WARE. 3. Scafco Corporation. 4. The Steel Network, Inc. B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Comply with ASTM C 645; roll-formed from hot-dipped galvanized steel; complying with ASTM A 1003/A 1003M and ASTM A 653/A 653M G40 (Z120) or having a coating that provides equivalent corrosion resistance. A40 galvannealed products are not acceptable. C. Steel Framing Components: Use either conventional steel studs and tracks or embossed, high- strength steel studs and tracks. 1. Conventional Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645, roll-formed galvanized steel. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection and stud spacing in accordance with recommendations of the Gypsum Association or the most recent edition of the USG “Gypsum Construction Handbook” but not less than 0.0329 inches (0.752 mm). b. Stud Depth: As indicated on the Drawings. c. Stud Spacing: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Embossed, High Strength Steel Studs and Tracks: Roll-formed and embossed with surface deformations to stiffen the framing members so that they are structurally comparable to conventional ASTM C645 steel studs and tracks. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection and stud spacing but not less than 0.0220 inches (0.560 mm). b. Stud Depth: As indicated on the Drawings. c. Stud Spacing: As indicated on the Drawings. 3. Concealed Mounting Plate Reinforcements: Galvanized, minimum 33 mils (20 gage) sheet steel complying with ASTM 366. Provide plates 6 inches wide, minimum width by full length of supported item. Provide concealed mounting plates for all items secured to partitions. a. Verify specific thicknesses, sizes and mounting needs with individual item suppliers. b. For items with requirements which exceed the performance of concealed mounting plate reinforcements, refer to Section "Miscellaneous Metals". February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 5 D. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of gypsum board applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Delta Star, Inc., Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; Slotted Track. E. Firestop Track: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Fire Trak Corp.; “Fire Trak” attached to studs with “Fire Trak Slip Clip”. b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; “The System”. F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). G. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2- inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. 2. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73-mm-) thick, galvanized steel. H. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm). I. Z-Shaped Furring: Galvanized, nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.455 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. J. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) un-coated steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange. 1. Depth: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm). 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). K. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. L. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 6 2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR CEILINGS A. Indirect Hung Ceiling Suspension System (New York City Only): Provide indirect type ceiling suspension complying with the Building Code of the City of New York “Reference Standard RS 5- 16” as follows: 1. Carrying Channels: ASTM C754, cold rolled steel channels, 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) , 475 lbs. per 1000 linear feet. Carrying channels shall be suspended from the structure by hangers. 2. Hangers: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) x 1 inch (25 mm) galvanized steel straps or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter galvanized steel rods. 3. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts or other devices applicable to the indicated method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers. Provide anchorage devices sized for three (3) times the calculated load supported. 4. Strap Iron Hanger Inserts: Galvanized, mild steel flats, 1 inch x 3/16 inch with 7/16 inch holes punched on center line and lower ends, designed to develop the full strength of hangers. 5. Strap Iron Hanger Inserts for Alteration Work: Galvanized, mild steel flats, 1 inch (25 mm) x 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) x 3 inches (75 mm) with 7/16 inch (11 mm) holes punched on center line and both ends, designed to develop the full strength of hangers and bent at 90 degree to permit anchor bolt attachment to existing slab. 6. Direct Hang Clips: Clips used to suspend main beams from 1-1/2 inch carrying channels; “CBS” Channel Beam Splice by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. or equal. 7. Metal Suspension-System: Manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories in accordance with ASTM C 635/C 635M and designated by type, structural classification, and finish indicated. 8. Seismic Restraints: Provide splay wires, wire or chain supports for light fixtures, independent wire supports for tees at perimeter of ceilings, compression posts and accessories in accordance with UBC Code requirements. B. Special Runner Supports And Suspension Members: 1. Where spacing of supports along runner members are in excess of 4 feet and up to 8 feet , the following steel channel runner members, spaced 4 feet on centers shall be installed: a. For spans not more than 5 feet (2 inch channel): .585 lb. per linear foot. b. For spans not more than 6 feet (2-1/2 inch channel): .684 lb. per linear foot. c. For spans not more than 8 feet (2-1/2 inch channel): 823 lb. per linear foot. 2. For spans 6 feet to 8 feet, provide mid-span 2 inch channel bridging continuous over and secured to top flange of each three runners. 3. Where distance between supports exceeds 8 feet, runners shall be supported from required steel support framing in accordance with the requirements of Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications". 2.04 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1396 / C 1396M and requirements referenced in Part 2 of this Section. B. Board Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 7 C. Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following unless noted otherwise below: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Continental Building Products (formerly Lafarge North America Inc.). 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. National Gypsum Company. 5. USG Corporation. D. Gypsum Board: Type X. 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. 3. Location: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly and where regular type gypsum board is normally used. E. Gypsum Ceiling Board: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. F. Moisture and Mold-Resistant: Gypsum board panels with moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Products: Provide one of the following where indicated: a. Certainteed Corporation; "M2Tech® Moisture & Mold Resistant Gypsum Board ". b. Georgia Pacific Gypsum LLC; “ToughRock® Mold-Guard™ Gypsum Board”. c. National Gypsum Company; "Gold Bond eXP® Interior Extreme® Gypsum Panel". d. American Gypsum Company; "M-Bloc Gypsum Board". 2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.05 TILE (STONE) BACKING PANELS A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. National Gypsum Company; “Gold Bond eXP Tile Backer. 2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274 4. Applications: Tile backing panels behind tile wall systems where indicated. B. Cementitious Backer Units: Complying with ANSI A118.9. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. National Gypsum Company; "PermaBase" cement board. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 8 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 3. Applications: Backing panels at showers, wet locations, stone facing panels, and resinous wall systems. C. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. 2.06 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. B. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet . C. Shapes: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners where indicate. 3. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges. 4. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use where indicated. 5. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound; use at exposed panel edges. 6. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated. D. Aluminum Trim: Extruded aluminum accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: provide products as indicated by Fry Reglet Corp., or equivalent products by one of the following: a. Gordon, Inc. b. Pittcon Industries. 2. Basis-Of-Design Products: a. Reveal Molding: "DRM-625-50 Reveal Molding". b. Fascia Corner Moulding: "FCM-625 Fascia Corner Molding". c. J Molding: "JDM-625 “J” Molding". 3. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5. 4. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 9 2.07 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Joint treatment materials shall comply with ASTM C 475 and requirements referenced in Part 2 of this Section. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: “ProForm Paper Joint Tape” as manufactured by National Gypsum Company 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Foil-backed Gypsum Board: As recommended by manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “ProForm All Purpose Joint Compound” as manufactured by National Gypsum Company. For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound or drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound or drying-type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide joint compound recommended by manufacturer. E. Vinyl Based Compound: Subject to compliance with requirements. Vinyl based compound for coating the underside of the concrete floor slabs (ceilings) shall be Cover Coat Compound as manufactured by United States Gypsum. F. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.08 ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide acoustical accessories that comply with referenced installation standards, requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing), Class A and produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Fire Blankets (SAFB) Formaldehyde Free" manufactured by Owens Corning. b. “Roxul AFB evo” manufactured by Rockwool. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 10 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Acoustical Smooth Board” with Ecose technology, formaldehyde free insulation manufactured by Knauf, where blanket insulation is not applicable. 3. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 4. Acoustical Performance: Provide sound attenuation blankets with the following minimum Co-Efficient at Frequencies indicated for 3-inch thickness when tested in accordance with ASTM C423: a. 125 Hz: 0.51. b. 250 Hz: 0.96. c. 500 Hz: 1.18. d. 1000 Hz: 1.03. e. 2000 Hz: 0.99. f. 4000 Hz: 0.96. g. NRC: 1.05. 5. Provide thicknesses as shown on the Drawings. C. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. 2. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. 3. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 4. Tremco Inc.; Tremflex 834. D. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. 1. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. E. Wall Isolation Pads: “Type Wallmat Pad with Type KAI Connectors” by Kinetics Noise Control; Dublin, OH. or approved equal. 1. Pad: 1/2-inch thick custom-molded, low-density glass fiber board installed continuously under wall framing. Pad is to be designed for static deflection of 0.175 inches at maximum rated load, and designed to carry continuous loads up to 25 psi without excessive creep or pad failure. 2. Rubber bushing assembly: Rubber bushing with a steel spacer and washer designed to accept a 1/4-inch diameter anchor and prevent direct contact between the anchor and the wall framing. F. Resilient Clips: “Iso-Max Sound Isolation Clips” by Kinetics Noise Control, Dublin, Ohio. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 11 1. Galvanized steel brackets constraining a rubber isolation element designed to accept a standard 7/8 in. by 25 gauge minimum galvanized steel furring channel. The channel legs are to snap fit into the rubber element without any metal-to-metal or other rigid contact with building elements. 2. Vertical Load: Minimum design load capacity of 36 lb. using 25 gauge furring channel, 48 lb. using 22 gauge furring channel. Design Load capacity shall be based on a safety factor where the load to failure, defined as pullout of the channel from the clip, is a minimum 2.5 times the allowable maximum Design Load. Anchors for attachment of the clips to the substructure shall be selected to support wall and/or ceiling weights at each clip. G. Isolated Wall Bracket: 1. Pre-drilled angle with integral resilient neoprene isolation element 2. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers: a. IPRB Wall Bracket by Kinetics Noise Control; Dublin, OH. b. AB-716 by Mason Industries; Hauppauge, NY. H. Sponge Neoprene: 1/2 inch thick closed-cell neoprene sponge rubber with rating of SCE-41, size as required or as shown on Drawings. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers: 1. “Type 4111-N Neoprene” by American National Rubber; Ceredo, WV. 2. “Type C121A Durafoam” by Monmouth Rubber and Plastics Corp., Long Branch, NJ. 3. “Type SCE41B Neoprene” by Blaylock Gasket and Packing, Fort Worth, TX. 2.09 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards, requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 12 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Examine the Contract Documents in order to ensure the completeness of the Work required under this Section. B. Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades, with particular attention given to the installation of items installed in gypsum board, so as not to delay job progress. 3.03 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. Comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 1. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip- type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.04 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION FRAMING A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings or overhead supports, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction. B. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install foam-gasket isolation strip between studs and wall. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 13 2. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. 3. Spacing: a. Gypsum Board Partitions: Space studs at 16 inches (406 mm) [24 inches (610 mm)] o.c., unless otherwise indicated. b. Tile Backer Board for Ceramic or Stone Tiling: Space studs at 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. maximum. 4. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. Cut studs 1/2 inch (13 mm) short of full height. Do not fasten studs to top track to allow independent movement of studs and track. 5. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. 6. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 7. Curved Partitions: a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. C. Door Openings: Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint. 3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. D. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. E. Direct Furring: Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. 3.05 FURRED AND SUSPENDED CEILINGS A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 14 B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Hangers: Shall be spaced a maximum of 4 feet on center. Attach to channels spaced on maximum 4 feet centers. D. Attach furring channels to channel runners at 16 inches on center at right angles to runners and securely wire tied to place. Provide end splices by nesting channels no less than 8 inches and securely wire tied to each other. E. Furring at concrete ceiling shall be done with furring channels placed at maximum 24 inch centers or as detailed and securely fastened. 3.06 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side of studs. C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 15 J. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. K. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. L. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications. M. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. 3.07 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: As indicated on Drawings and where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 3. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Abuse-Resistant Type: Typical for exposed vertical surfaces as indicated on Drawings. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. Ceilings: Apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Partitions/walls: Apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) , unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. 3. Stairwells and Other High Walls: Install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 4. End Joints: Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. 5. Z-Furring Members: Apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 6. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. Ceilings: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire- resistance-rated assembly. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 16 2. Partitions/walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face- layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. Z-furring Members: Apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. D. Metal Furring on Walls: 1. Furring applied horizontally, directly to masonry, shall be galvanized steel spaced 2 feet o.c. shimmed out and aligned to a true flat plane fastened with power-driven screws 12 inches o.c. Behind horizontal gypsum board joints provide battens and at ceiling install casing bead. 2. Freestanding gypsum board furring shall be of 2-1/2 inches galvanized steel screw studs spaced 2 feet o.c. with horizontal braces between studs. Brace studs to masonry and fasten to masonry with power-driven screws. Studs shall be set in and fastened to top and bottom tracks. Provide battens behind horizontal gypsum board joints. E. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. 3.08 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at showers, tubs, and where indicated. C. Water-Resistant Backing Board: 1. Install where indicated with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 2. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.09 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners where indicated. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 17 3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 5. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges where indicated. 6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings. D. Aluminum Trim: Install aluminum trim in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.10 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 1: Provide at ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Provide at panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: Provide at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Level 5: Provide at surfaces receiving gloss and semi-gloss enamels, wall coverings, polishing plasters, plaster veneers, and surfaces subject to severe lighting. At joints and interior angles embed the tape in the joint compound and immediately apply the joint compound over the tape. Apply two additional separate coats of the joint compound over flat joints. Apply one additional coat of the joint compound over interior angles. Apply three separate coats of the joint compound over fastener heads and flanges of trim accessories. Panel surfaces and the joint compound must be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Then skim coat over the entire gypsum board surface. Surfaces must be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Refer to Drawings for locations, include all accent color painted areas. E. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840. 1. Ceilings (exceeding 2,500sq ft in area): No more than 50 feet in either direction. 2. Wall Partitions or Furred Walls: No more than 30 feet. 3. At locations of building expansion joints. 4. Specific locations chosen and approved by Architect for visual effect. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 18 - 18 3.11 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from gypsum compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Tiling 09 30 00 - 1 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Porcelain and ceramic tiles. 2. Mosaic tiles. 3. Tile setting beds and grouts. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 2. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for glass-mat, water-resistant backer board. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's latest published literature for tiling specified herein for approval, and obtain approval before materials are delivered to the site. 1. Submit a "Master Grade Certificate" in the form approved in the referenced "Standard" for each type of tile, signed by the manufacturer and the Contractor, certifying to the grade, type and quantity of tile. Include identifying information for each container. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile. Provide plans and elevations showing tile layout, tile pattern, and edge trim based on field measurements. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. C. Samples: Submit samples of materials specified herein for approval, and obtain approval before materials are delivered to the site. 1. Submit two (2) samples of each tile material and cured grout sample specified herein. 2. Submit two (2) samples of edge trim. D. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Data: For Installer. 2. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. 3. Product Certificates: For each type of product. 4. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products and certified porcelain tile. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Tiling 09 30 00 - 2 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer is a Five-Star member of the National Tile Contractors Association or a Trowel of Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America. 2. Installer's supervisor for Project holds the International Masonry Institute's Foreman Certification. 3. Installer employs only Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or installers recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers for Project. 4. Installer employs at least one installer for Project that has completed the Advanced Certification for Tile Installers (ACT) certification for installation of mud floors, mud walls, membranes, shower receptors, and large format tile. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation. 2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. C. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project to review materials, methods and sequence of Work of this Section, special details and conditions, standard of workmanship, and other pertinent topics related to the Work. The meeting shall include the Architect, the Contractor, and the Installer, and any other subcontractors whose work requires coordination with the work of this Section. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging and store in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Tiling 09 30 00 - 3 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Reference Standards: Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein, the current edition industry standards, referred to below, shall apply to work under this section. Where requirements indicated on the Drawings or specified herein differ from the industry standards, the more stringent requirements shall govern. 1. TCA “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; 2012. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A108.1B Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar - 1999 ANSI A108.5 "Standard Specifications For Ceramic Tile Installed With Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar" ANSI A108.10 Installation of Grouting in Tilework – 1999 ANSI A118.3 Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive - 1999 ANSI A118.4 "Standard Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar" ANSI 137.1 "Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" ASTM C 144 “Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar” ASTM C 150 “Standard Specification for Portland Cement” ISO 13007 “International Standards Organization; classification for Grout and Adhesives” B. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and the Accessibility Building Code of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer. 1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer. 2. Obtain waterproof/crack isolation membrane, from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Tiling 09 30 00 - 4 D. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. E. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. F. Field - Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated (or noted in manufacturer’s published installation instructions) under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by pre-coating with continuous film of grout release. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces. 2.03 PORCELAIN AND CERAMIC TILES A. Porcelain Tile “Electra Grande” as manufactured by Stone Source: 1. Product: Porcelain tile 2. Thickness: 3/8 Inches. 3. Color: Refer to Finish Schedule 4. Installation: Refer to Manufacturer’s written instructions B. Match Architect’s approved samples. 2.04 GLASS TILES A. Glass Tile Mosaic “Felicity Glass Tile”, as manufactured by American Olean: 1. Product: Glass tile 2. Thickness: 5/16 Inches. 3. Color: Refer to Finish Schedule 4. Installation: Refer to Manufacturer’s written instructions 2.05 TILE SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex Modified Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): Comply with ANSI A118.4. 1. Products: Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with styrene-butadiene-rubber liquid- latex additive at Project site. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. LATICRETE International, Inc.; "Laticrete 254 Platinum” Multipurpose Thin-Set Mortar with latex additive. b. MAPEI Americas; “MAPEI Kerabond/Keralastic System”. 2. Wall Applications: Provide mortar that complies with requirements for non-sagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. 3. Applications: Bond coats from 3/32 to 1/4 inches thick. B. Materials - Miscellaneous: February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Tiling 09 30 00 - 5 1. Latex Additive: Manufacturer’s standard styrene-butadiene-rubber water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex- additive manufacturer. 2. Water: Clear and without deleterious substances which would impair the work. 3. Sealer/Primer (for Substrate): As recommended by manufacturer of setting bed. 2.06 GROUT MATERIALS A. General: Refer to the Finish Schedule. B. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout for Floor and Wall Tile: ANSI A118.6 and ANSI A118.7, ISO 13007. 1. Products: For grout joints 1/16 inch to 1/2 inch; a. LATICRETE International, Inc.; “PERMACOLOR® Select Grout”. b. MAPEI Corporation; "MAPEI Flexcolor CQ". 2. Polymer Type: Styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: 1. “Stone and Tile Sealer”, as manufactured by ECOS Paints. 2.07 WATERPROOFING/CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. Provide compatible product by the same manufacturer of tile setting material. B. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. LATICRETE International, Inc.; "Hydro Ban". 2. MAPEI Corporation; “Mapelastic AquaDefense”. C. Performance: 1. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M, Procedure E; maximum 0.15 perms. 2. Crack Isolation: “High Performance” rating when tested to the “System Crack Resistance” portion of ANSI A118.12. 2.08 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide edging units wherever tile transitions to other finishes. B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Tiling 09 30 00 - 6 C. Edge Strips: “Schluter®-JOLLY” edging by Schluter® Systems. 1. Description: L-shaped profile with 1/8" (3.2 mm) wide top section and vertical wall section that together form the visible surface, integrated trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg, and integrated grout joint spacer. 2. Anchoring Leg: Straight anchoring leg. 3. Material and Finish: AC color-coated aluminum; GS – Black. D. Transition Strips to other Floor Coverings: Refer to Drawings. E. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with bonded mortar bed or thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, saddles, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Surfaces designed to receive tile shall be cleaned of objectionable material so as to assure a satisfactory bond with the setting materials. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Tiling 09 30 00 - 7 C. Prepared floors with a rough and level finish to provide a satisfactory bond with the setting bed mortar, where setting bed mortars are applied directly to concrete floors. D. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproof membrane by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains. E. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. F. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of temporary protective coating indicated below, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces: 3.03 TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. B. Tiling shall be performed by skilled workmen and shall complying with the requirements of the "Reference Standards" specified herein. C. Setting materials, mortar beds, adhesives, and grouts shall be of the types specified herein for the various uses. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. D. Setting Tiles: 1. Set tile flush with adjoining units, level, true and plumb. 2. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Cutting, as far as practicable, shall be done by power saws. Cut edges shall be smooth, straight and free from chips. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. 3. Hand-cut tiles shall be filed or ground smooth on the cut edge. 4. Corners, coves, angles or other trim shapes shall be furnished and installed. 5. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. 6. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 7. Accurately form intersections and returns. Fit tile neatly around openings. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. 8. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Tiling 09 30 00 - 8 9. Broken, cracked, marred or otherwise defective tile or base shall be replaced before the setting material has set. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in pattern as shown on Drawings. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 2. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. 3. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. F. Joint Width: Install tile with the following joint widths unless otherwise indicated. The joint width of all sanded or epoxy grouts shall be 1/8 inch minimum. 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: [1/16 inch (1.6 mm)] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm)]. 2. Porcelain Tile: [1/4 inch (6.4 mm)] [3/8 inch (9.5 mm)]. 3. Pressed Floor Tile: [1/4 inch (6.4 mm)] [3/8 inch (9.5 mm)]. 4. Glazed Wall Tile: [1/16 inch (1.6 mm)] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm)]. 5. Quarry Tile: [1/4 inch (6.4 mm)] [3/8 inch (9.5 mm)]. G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated or as required by tile manufacturer, but not more than 20-25 feet in both directions. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 2. Where tilework is exposed to direct sunlight, space joints not more than 8-10 feet in both directions. H. Grouting: Grouting of joints shall be done on the same day that tile is set, unless otherwise recommended by the tile and/or setting material manufacturers. Grout shall be struck or tooled to the depth of the cushion. Grout in tile floors shall be flush with the tile surface. Excess grout shall be removed before it has set. Plant-mixed grout shall be installed in strict accordance with the printed directions of approved manufacturer. I. Grout Sealer: Provide grout manufacturer’s recommended sealer and apply in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. J. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated. If not indicated, install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated. K. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Tiling 09 30 00 - 9 3.04 WATERPROOFING/CRACK-ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Priming: Prime as required by membrane manufacturer. Priming shall be applied over rough or porous broom finished concrete, etc., and on unpainted or unprimed metal. B. Membrane: Install waterproofing membrane in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. C. Flashing and Cove Treatment: Where vertical surfaces, including pipes, drains, walls, etc. join concrete slabs, integral flashings shall be made by coating both the vertical and horizontal surfaces not less than 4 inches up and out from the junction. Allow to set and recoat with membrane. Treat metal flashing rings, collars, drains, etc. in the same manner. Where an isolation joint exists, follow procedures as above, and carry through as an expansion joint. Recoat as above. Provide waterproofing membrane at all toilet room floors, unless otherwise indicated. D. Joints and Cracks: Fill and treat joints as required by membrane manufacturer. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all stone tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. Do not use acid or acid cleaners on tile. 1. Remove latex-portland cement and epoxy grout residue from tile in strict accord with manufacturer’s current, published instructions. 2. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains. C. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. 2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed. 3. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 1 SECTION 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical ceiling panels. 2. Exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for gypsum board ceilings and soffits. C. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and all ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Ceiling suspension members. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections. 4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger-wire attachment where conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing. 5. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Two (2) sets of 6-inch square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Two (2) sets of 12-inch long Samples of each type, finish, and color. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints for ceiling systems. Include design calculations for seismic restraints including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation E. Informational Submittals: February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 2 1. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling. 2. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES. 3. Field quality-control reports. F. Closeout Submittals: Maintenance Data to include in maintenance manuals. G. Provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) certifying or manufacturer’s literature identifying the Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content in grams/liter or lbs./gallon for all field-applied adhesives, sealants, paints and coatings used for interior applications. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP- accredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified. B. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 3 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" to design seismic restraints for ceiling systems. B. Seismic Standard: Suspended ceilings shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. Comply with ASTM E 580. C. Structural Requirements of Suspension System: Provide primary suspension components of suitable design and adequate strength to support the acoustic materials, light fixtures, diffusers and other items attached to or hanging from the ceiling system. Maximum deflection shall not exceed 1/360 of the span between supports. D. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795. E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: Class A [B] [C] according to ASTM E 1264. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 [450] or less. F. Ceiling Plenums: Unfaced fiberglass batt insulation shall not be used above suspended ceilings. If used in plenums and shafts, fiberglass batt insulation shall be encapsulated and formaldehyde-free. Fiberglass board products used in plenums, shafts or for insulating ductwork shall be wrapped or enclosed. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 4 G. Antimicrobial Treatment: For each panel type, provide Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273, ASTM D 3274, or ASTM G 21 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. 2.02 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Acoustical Panels: "Lyra PB Square Lay-In 15/16" ceiling systems by Armstrong World Industries as indicated on the “Finish Schedule”. 1. Module Size: Various 2. Material: Fiberglass 3. Light Reflectance: 0.88. 4. NRC: 0.95. 5. AC: 190 6. Edge Detail: Square Lay-In. 7. Grid: Prelude 15/16 Inch 8. Color: Refer to Finish Schedule B. Match Architect’s approved samples. 2.03 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Basis-of-Design Products: The design of the project is based on acoustical ceiling products as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named products or equivalent products by one of the following: 1. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic. B. Indirect Hung Ceiling Suspension System (New York City Only): Provide indirect type ceiling suspension complying with the Building Code of the City of New York “Reference Standard RS 5- 16” as follows: 1. Carrying Channels: ASTM C754, cold rolled steel channels, 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) , 475 lbs. per 1000 linear feet. Carrying channels shall be suspended from the structure by hangers. 2. Hangers: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) x 1 inch (25 mm) galvanized steel straps or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter galvanized steel rods. 3. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts or other devices applicable to the indicated method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers. Provide anchorage devices sized for three (3) times the calculated load supported. 4. Strap Iron Hanger Inserts: Galvanized, mild steel flats, 1 inch x 3/16 inch with 7/16 inch holes punched on center line and lower ends, designed to develop the full strength of hangers. 5. Strap Iron Hanger Inserts for Alteration Work: Galvanized, mild steel flats, 1 inch (25 mm) x 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) x 3 inches (75 mm) with 7/16 inch (11 mm) holes punched on center line and both ends, designed to develop the full strength of hangers and bent at 90 degree to permit anchor bolt attachment to existing slab. 6. Direct Hang Clips: Clips used to suspend main beams from 1-1/2 inch carrying channels; “CBS” Channel Beam Splice by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. or equal. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 5 7. Metal Suspension-System: Manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories in accordance with ASTM C 635/C 635M and designated by type, structural classification, and finish indicated. 8. Seismic Restraints: Provide splay wires, wire or chain supports for light fixtures, independent wire supports for tees at perimeter of ceilings, compression posts and accessories in accordance with UBC Code requirements. C. Special Runner Supports And Suspension Members: 1. Where spacing of supports along runner members are in excess of 4 feet and up to 8 feet, the following steel channel runner members, spaced 4 feet on centers shall be installed: a. For spans not more than 5 feet (2 inch channel): .585 lb. per linear foot. b. For spans not more than 6 feet (2-1/2 inch channel): .684 lb. per linear foot. c. For spans not more than 8 feet (2-1/2 inch channel): 823 lb. per linear foot. 2. For spans 6 feet to 8 feet, provide mid-span 2 inch channel bridging continuous over and secured to top flange of each three runners. 3. Where distance between supports exceeds 8 feet, runners shall be supported from required steel support framing in accordance with the requirements of Section "Miscellaneous Metal". 2.04 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3. USG Interiors, Inc. B. Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Provide step molding (straight molding only where shown). Provide manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 2. For narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and manufacturer's standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners. 3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. C. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim at “ACT-X”: Where indicated, provide extruded- aluminum edge moldings and trim or roll-formed edge moldings and trim, as standard with manufacturer, of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements and the following: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: "Axiom® Vector™ Trim", 6 inch straight perimeter trim with matching outside corner posts by Armstrong World Industries, Inc., or comparable product by one of the following: February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 6 a. CertainTeed Corp. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation. c. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. 2. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for Alloy and Temper 6063-T5. 3. Finish: AA-C12C42R1x; baked polyester finish complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. a. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. b. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M and coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 2.05 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. B. Acoustical Sealant Products: 1. Pecora Corp; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. 2. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 635 and C 636, seismic design requirements indicated, and manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 7 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power- actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 8 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as indicated on Reflected Ceiling Plans. 2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 4. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 5. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire- resistance-rated assembly. 3.04 CLEANING ADJUSTING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Resilient Flooring and Base 09 65 00 - 1 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Luxury vinyl tiling. 2. Resilient base. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1. Show details of special patterns. C. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (152-by- 230-mm) sections of each color and pattern of floor covering required. 1. Heat-Welding Bead: Include manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches (230 mm) long, of each color required. D. Heat-Welded Seam Samples: For each floor covering product and welding bead color and pattern combination required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch (152-by- 230-mm) Sample applied to rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project. E. Product Schedule: For floor covering. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. G. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals. H. Moisture and Adhesion Tests: Submit copies of the following on-site tests identified in PART 3 - EXECUTION. 1. Alkalinity and adhesion testing. 2. Anhydrous calcium chloride testing. 3. Relative humidity testing. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Resilient Flooring and Base 09 65 00 - 2 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the project site in the manufacturer's unopened containers, clearly marked with manufacturer's label. B. Carefully handle materials and store in original containers at not less than 65 degrees F for at least 48 hours before start of installation. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods: 1. 72 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 72 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 72 hours after floor covering installation. E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Resilient Flooring: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of resilient flooring and base installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of resilient flooring due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Resilient Flooring and Base 09 65 00 - 3 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Resilient Flooring: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type flooring indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). 2. Resilient Base: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 lin. ft. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. B. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: See drawings for colors and patterns of materials specified. Resilient materials shall be furnished from single runs. Plain colors shall be uniform throughout in color. Variations from piece to piece with variegated colors shall not be so wide as to mar the decorative value of floor. 2.02 LUXURY VINYL TILE FLOORING A. Luxury Vinyl Tile “LVT-1”: Provide “Solitude”, as manufactured by Shaw Contract: 1. Material: Commercial luxury vinyl tile 2. Finish: ExoGuard quartz-enhanced urethane 3. Color: Refer to the Finish Schedule. 4. Installation Pattern: Refer to Drawings. 5. Dimensions: 6 inch x 48 inch B. Match Architect’s approved samples. 2.03 RESILIENT BASES A. Resilient Bases: Provide the following products where indicated on the Drawings. 1. “BaseWorks Thermoset Rubber Base (Type TS)” as manufactured by Johnsonite. 2. “Pinnacle Rubber Wall Base” as manufactured by Roppe. 3. “Straight Base” as manufactured by Allstate Rubber. 4. “Cove Base” as manufactured by Allstate Rubber. B. Resilient Base: Conform to the requirements of ASTM F 1861, Group 1, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). 1. Style: Top shall have a radius edge. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Resilient Flooring and Base 09 65 00 - 4 a. Cove (base with toe) at vinyl tile and sheet vinyl flooring. b. Set-on Type (Straight) at sheet carpet and carpet tile. 2. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). 3. Height: 2-1/2 inches. 4. Length: Manufacturer's standard length coils. 5. Corners: Preformed inside and outside corners. 6. Finish: Polished outer surface and ribbed back. 7. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Match Architect’s approved samples. D. Refer to the Finish Schedule. 2.04 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor covering manufacturer for products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L. b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L. C. Moisture Barrier: Where required by substrate conditions and approved for use by floor covering manufacturer, provide epoxy-based moisture barrier adhesive system equal to "Koester VAP I 2000 Waterproofing System" or “Ardex Moisture Control System”. D. Beveled Edging Strips: Composed of vinyl 2 inch wide by minimum 36 inches long by 1/8 inch thick. Beveled edging strips by approved tile supplier shall meet or exceed applicable requirements for vinyl tile as indicated in Federal Specifications SS-T-312, Type III. Color of edging strips shall be as selected and approved by OHA Contracting Officer Representative. E. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions. B. Examine substrate for conformance to finish and cleanliness requirements described in other sections of specifications. Substrate for resilient flooring is not considered acceptable when plane of surface varies more than 1/8 inch in any 6 foot distance, or more than 1/16 inch in any one foot distance. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Resilient Flooring and Base 09 65 00 - 5 C. Do not install materials until subfloors have been tested for dryness as hereinafter described, and are sufficiently dry to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Underlayment Over Access Flooring: Install with a full spread of adhesive. Mechanically fasten 8 inches o.c.; or as recommended by manufacturer. Tape and seal joints. C. Close off to traffic and other work in spaces where flooring is being laid. D. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Submit documentation of test result to the Architect prior to installations. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours, or in compliance with moisture-vapor-emission rate acceptable to the flooring manufacturer. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement. E. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. F. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install resilient floor and base products in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Resilient Flooring and Base 09 65 00 - 6 B. Underlayment: Install underlayment on surfaces to receive resilient flooring where subfloors do not conform to above surface requirements. Underlayment shall be compatible with adhesive used and shall produce a satisfactory smooth even surface, eliminating projections, depressions, or other inequalities, including joints. Underlayment shall be a latex type recommended by the manufacturer of resilient flooring used. C. Resilient Tile Flooring: 1. Install flooring wall to wall before the installation of floor-set cabinets, casework, furniture, equipment, movable partitions, etc. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door recesses, closets, and similar openings as shown on the drawings. 2. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 3. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 4. Scribe, cut, and fit to permanent fixtures, columns, walls, partitions, pipes, outlets, and built- in furniture and cabinets. 5. Install flooring with adhesives, tools, and procedures in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. Refer to specific rolling instructions of the tile manufacturer. 7. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. 8. Installation of Accessories: Fill voids with plastic filler along the top edge of the resilient wall base or integral cove cap on masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates. 9. Polish floor tile in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. D. Resilient Base: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. 2. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 3. Set base in longest available lengths with no pieces less than 12 inches long (except on surfaces less than 12 inches long) without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 4. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. Use waterproof type adhesives. 5. Cut, trim and butt joints accurately and tightly against abutting work. 6. Apply smooth leveling coat of underlayment where surfaces to which base is to be applied show voids or inequalities. Underlayment shall be compatible with adhesive used for base. 7. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended filler material. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Resilient Flooring and Base 09 65 00 - 7 3.04 PROTECTION, CLEANING AND FINISHING A. After installation, clean work to remove spots of adhesive and surface stains, remove waste materials from building, and leave floors broom clean and in good condition. B. Follow manufacturer’s written instructions for cleaning and finishing for each resilient flooring product. C. Provide and maintain protection for resilient flooring installation to prevent damages. Remove protection when directed or at time of final acceptance of work. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Static-Control Resilient Flooring 09 65 36 - 1 SECTION 09 65 36 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Static-dissipative flooring. A. Related Requirements: 1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with static-control resilient floor coverings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1. Show details of special patterns. 2. Submit grounding diagram showing location of grounding strips and connections. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering indicated. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of floor covering indicated and of size indicated below: 1. Floor Tile: Full-size units. E. Product Schedule: For floor covering. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for floor coverings. H. Field quality-control reports. I. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals. J. Moisture and Adhesion Tests: Submit copies of the following on-site tests identified in PART 3 - EXECUTION. 1. Alkalinity and adhesion testing. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Static-Control Resilient Flooring 09 65 36 - 2 2. Anhydrous calcium chloride testing. 3. Relative humidity testing. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by manufacturer for installation techniques required. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for floor coverings including resilient base and accessories. a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by Architect. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to static-control resilient floor coverings including, but not limited to, the following: a. Examination and preparation of substrates to receive floor covering. b. Installation. c. Field quality-control testing. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the project site in the manufacturer's unopened containers, clearly marked with manufacturer's label. B. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). 1. Floor Tile: Store on flat surfaces. 2. Sheet Floor Covering: Store rolls upright. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C), in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Static-Control Resilient Flooring 09 65 36 - 3 B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation and for 72 hours after floor covering installation. D. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Resilient Flooring: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpeting installation that fail in materials or workman- ship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of resilient flooring due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge ravel- ing, snags, runs, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Resilient Flooring: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type floor- ing indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). 2. Resilient Base: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicat- ed, but not less than 10 lin. ft. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. B. Static-Dissipative Properties: Provide static-control resilient flooring with static-control properties indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by an independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Electrical Resistance: Test per ASTM F 150 with 100-V applied voltage; a. Average greater than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohms when test specimens are tested surface to ground. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Static-Control Resilient Flooring 09 65 36 - 4 b. Average greater than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohms when installed floor coverings are tested surface to ground. 2. Static Generation: Less than 300 volts when tested per AATCC-134 at 20 percent relative humidity with conductive footwear. 3. Static Decay: 5000 to zero V in less than 0.25 seconds when tested per FED-STD- 101C/4046.1. C. Conductive Tile Performance: Provide static-control resilient flooring with static-control properties indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by an independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Electrical Resistance: Test per ASTM F 150 with 500-V applied voltage; a. Average greater than 25,000 ohms and less than 1 megohm when test specimens and installed floor coverings are tested surface to surface (point to point). b. Average greater than 25,000 ohms with no single measurement less than 10,000 ohms when installed floor coverings are tested surface to ground. 2. Static Generation: Less than 100 V when tested per AATCC-134 at 20 percent relative humidity with conductive footwear. 3. Static Decay: Less than 0.03 seconds, from 5000 volts to 0 volts, when tested per FED- STD-101C/4046.1. D. FloorScore Compliance: Static-control resilient flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification. E. VOC Content: Provide field-applied paints and coatings, used for interior applications that meet the volatile organic compound (VOC) and chemical component limitations as defined under Divi- sion 01 Section “Limits for Volatile Organic Compound Contents for Adhesives, Sealants, Paints and Coatings“. 2.02 STATIC DISSIPATIVE RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Excelon" by Armstrong World Industries. B. Static Dissipative Floor Tile: ASTM F 1066, Class 2 (through-pattern). 1. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.175 mm). 2. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm). 3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. C. Static-Dissipative Properties: Provide static-control resilient flooring with static-control properties indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by an independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Electrical Resistance: Test per ASTM F 150 with 100-V applied voltage or ESD-STM-7.1. 2. Static Generation: Less than 300 V when tested per AATCC-134 at 20 percent relative humidity with conductive footwear. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Static-Control Resilient Flooring 09 65 36 - 5 3. Static Decay: 5000 to zero V in less than 0.25 seconds when tested per FED-STD- 101C/4046.1. 2.03 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Hardwood Underlayment at Access Flooring: “Ultraply XL” as manufactured by Moreland or an approved equal. 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch thick plywood. 2. Exposed Surface: Smooth finish. 3. Adhesive and Mechanical Fasteners: As required to bind hardwood underlayment to access flooring. C. Static-Control Adhesive: Adhesive that maintains electrical continuity of floor covering system to ground connection as recommended by flooring manufacturer. D. Grounding Strips: Of type and size that maintains electrical continuity of floor covering system to ground connection as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. E. Maintenance Floor Tiles: Special floor tiles inscribed "Conductive floor. Do not wax." F. Floor Polish: Provide protective, static-control liquid floor polish products as recommended by floor covering manufacturer. G. Moisture Barrier: Where required by substrate conditions that do not pass moisture testing and approved for use by floor covering manufacturer, provide epoxy-based moisture barrier adhesive system by one of the following: 1. "Koester VAP 1® 2000 Waterproofing System" by Koester American Corporation, "Ardex P51™ Primer" 2. "Ardex V 1200™" Self-Leveling Flooring Underlayment by Ardex Engineered Cements. 3. Approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer and manufacturer's representative present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion or static-control characteristics of floor coverings. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Static-Control Resilient Flooring 09 65 36 - 6 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions and with oversight by manufacturer's representative to ensure adhesion of floor coverings and electrical continuity of floor covering systems. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours, or in compliance with moisture-vapor-emission rate acceptable to the flooring manufacturer. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement. C. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method recommended by access flooring manufacturer. D. Underlayment over Access Flooring: Mechanically fasten and glue underlayment to access flooring panel. Tape and seal joints. E. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. F. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. G. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install static-control resilient floor covering according to manufacturer's written instructions and with oversight by manufacturer's representative. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Static-Control Resilient Flooring 09 65 36 - 7 B. Embed grounding strips in static-control adhesive. Extend grounding strips beyond perimeter of static-control resilient floor covering surfaces to ground connections. C. Scribe, cut, and fit floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. D. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor covering to center of door openings. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. F. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of floor coverings installed on covers. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of static-control adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.04 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so floor tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half floor tile at perimeter. 1. Lay floor tiles square with room axis. C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting floor tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed floor tiles. 1. Lay static-dissipative, vinyl composition floor tiles with grain running in one direction. D. In each space where conductive, solid vinyl floor tile is installed, install maintenance floor tile identifying conductive floor tile in location approved by Architect. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to test electrical resistance of static-control resilient floor covering systems for compliance with requirements. 1. Arrange for testing after installation static-control adhesives have fully cured and floor covering systems have stabilized to ambient conditions and after ground connections are completed. 2. Arrange for testing of floor coverings before and after performing floor polish procedures. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Static-Control Resilient Flooring 09 65 36 - 8 B. Static-control resilient floor coverings will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 1. Remove static-control adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. 1. Do not wax static-control resilient floor coverings. 2. If recommended in writing by manufacturer, apply protective static-control floor polish formulated to maintain or enhance floor coverings electrical properties to floor covering surfaces that are free from soil, static-control adhesive, and surface blemishes. a. Verify that both floor polish and its application method are approved by manufacturer and that floor polish will not leave an insulating film that reduces floor coverings' effectiveness for static control. D. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Carpeting 09 68 00 - 1 SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Modular tile carpeting. 2. Sheet carpeting. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 09 Sections for adjacent flooring materials and resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Carpeting type, color, and dye lot. 3. Condition of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Pattern repeat size for sheet carpeting. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Carpet Tile Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples. 3. Sheet Carpeting: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square sample, 12-inch (150-mm) seam sample, and 12-inch- (300-mm-) square mitered carpet border -seam sample. Show carpet pattern alignment. D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions for each carpet specified. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Carpeting 09 68 00 - 2 E. Qualification Data: For Installer. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. G. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpeting, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpeting. H. Moisture and Adhesion Tests: Submit copies of the following on-site tests identified in PART 3 - EXECUTION. 1. Alkalinity and adhesion testing. 2. Anhydrous calcium chloride testing. 3. Relative humidity testing. I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines. D. Mockups: Before installing carpet, build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of Substantial Completion. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to carpet installation including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. 2. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling" and the manufacturer’s written instructions for delivery, storage, and handling. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Carpeting 09 68 00 - 3 B. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, fire hazard classification, and lot number. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity; laid flat, blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40 degrees F. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpeting until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Where metal and glass partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpeting: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpeting installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, delamination, bowing, skewing, excess static discharge, and visible color variation between dye-lots and control sample.. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). 2. Sheet Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Carpeting 09 68 00 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf (445 N) per ASTM D 2646. 2. Tuft Bind: Not less than 10 lbf (45 N) per ASTM D 1335. 3. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC 165. 4. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 (AATCC fading units) per AATCC 16, Option E. 5. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) of specified size dimensions, as determined by physical measurement. 6. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less per ISO 2551 (Aachen Test). B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 2. Smoke Density: NFPA (NBS Smoke Chamber); less than 450 flaming mode. C. Environmental: 1. Primary and secondary backing shall contain no PVC. 2. Biological inhibitors (if used) shall not be topically applied. 3. Manufacturer shall have an ongoing reclamation program that will be in effect for carpet to be installed under this Project to ensure that no carpet when leaving the site of this Project will be sent to landfill. 4. Manufacturers shall have an environmental commitment for both their products and their manufacturing processes. Including but not limited to a “cradle to cradle” policy and recycled content in products. 5. Installation shall comply with Carpet and Rug Institute’s (CRI) requirements for indoor environmental quality as described under Part 3 - Execution of this Section. 6. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria; not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria; no fungal growth; per AATCC 174. 7. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV per AATCC 134. 2.02 TILE CARPETING A. Subject to Performance and Sustainability requirements provide Carpeting as indicated on Finish Schedule. 1. Carpet Tile “CPT-1”: “Chronicle”, as manufactured by Bentley Mills. 2. Carpet Tile “CPT-2”: “Ritual”, as manufactured by Bentley Mills. B. Carpet Backing: 1. Shaw Contract: Provide “EcoWorx” carpet backing for carpeting selected and manufactured by Shaw Contract. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Carpeting 09 68 00 - 5 2. Bentley Mills: Provide “NextStep” carpet backing for carpeting selected and manufactured by Bentley Mills. 3. Modulyss: Provide carpeting with Modulyss’ environmental backing options. C. Refer to the Finish Schedule. D. Match Architect’s approved samples. 2.03 SHEET CARPETING A. Subject to Performance and Sustainability requirements provide Carpeting as indicated on Finish Schedule. 1. Sheet carpeting”CP-1”: “Gather”, as manufactured by Shaw Contract. 2. Carpet Backing: 1. Shaw Contract: Provide “EcoWorx” carpet backing for carpeting selected and manufactured by Shaw Contract. 2. Bentley Mills: Provide “NextStep” carpet backing for carpeting selected and manufactured by Bentley Mills. 3. Modulyss: Provide carpeting with Modulyss’ environmental backing options. 3. Refer to the Finish Schedule. 4. Match Architect’s approved samples. 2.04 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, non-staining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpeting and is recommended by the carpet manufacturer. For carpet tile provide adhesives recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. C. Seam Adhesive for Sheet Carpeting: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. D. Metal Transition Strips to other Floor Coverings: Stainless steel of size and design as indicated on the Drawings. E. Moisture Barrier: Where required by substrate conditions and approved for use by floor covering manufacturer, provide epoxy-based moisture barrier adhesive system equal to "Koester VAP I 2000 Waterproofing System" or “Ardex Moisture Control System”. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Carpeting 09 68 00 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm), unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive. E. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Submit documentation of test result to the Architect prior to installations. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours, or in compliance with moisture-vapor- emission rate acceptable to the flooring manufacturer. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement. F. Moisture Barrier: If required, install moisture barrier in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Carpeting 09 68 00 - 7 G. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpeting. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF CARPET TILES A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. H. Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF SHEET CARPETING A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following: 1. Tackless installation over pad. B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. C. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Carpeting 09 68 00 - 8 3.05 ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES A. Remove tiles from boxes one day prior to installation and ventilate storage area with fresh air during that time period. B. Ventilate work area with fresh air throughout installation process. C. Ventilate installed carpet with fresh air for 72 hours prior to use of space. D. Follow CRI installation instructions. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Wall Coverings 09 72 00 - 1 SECTION 09 72 00 WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Wall coverings. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for wall preparation to receive wall covering. 2. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for priming wall surfaces. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics. B. Samples for Verification: Full width by 36-inch long section of wall covering from dye lot to be used for each type of wall covering indicated for each color, texture, and pattern required. 1. With specified treatments applied. 2. Show complete pattern repeat. C. Schedule: For wall coverings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. D. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate appearance and aesthetic effects and set quality standards for installation. 1. Provide a mockup for each type of wall covering on each substrate required. Comply with requirements in ASTM F 1141. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Wall Coverings 09 72 00 - 2 B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a permanent level of lighting is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Rolls of Wall Covering Material: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from same print run or dye lot. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. c. Fire-Growth Contribution: No flashover and heat and smoke release according to NFPA 286. 2.02 WALL COVERINGS A. Provide Wallcovering “Bespoke DNA”, as manufactured by Designtex and indicated on Finish Schedule. B. Match Architect’s approved samples. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended adhesive, manufactured expressly for use with the selected wall covering. Provide materials which are mildew-resistant and non-staining to the wall covering. Provide manufacturer's strippable-type adhesive for use with wall covering applied over gypsum board. Provide manufacturer's certification that recommended adhesive will permit removal of wall covering from gypsum board surfaces without damage to paper facing. B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, complying with requirements in Division 09 Section “Interior Painting” and recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer for intended substrate. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Wall Coverings 09 72 00 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer recommended by wall covering manufacturer. 3. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply metal primer. 4. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. F. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with wall covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Cut wall covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and corners. C. Install strips in same order as cut from roll. D. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 6 inches (150 mm) from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are permitted. E. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. F. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Wall Coverings 09 72 00 - 4 G. Install reversing every other strip. H. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without any overlay or spacing between strips. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Stretched-Fabric Wall Systems 09 77 13 - 1 SECTION 09 77 13 STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Site-upholstered stretched-fabric wall system. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 06 Section “Interior Architectural Woodwork”. 2. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for gypsum board substrates. 3. Division 09 Section “Interior Painting”. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's product data sheets, details, specifications, performance data, physical properties and installation instructions. 2. Provide additional information required for fabric, including size limitations, fire resistance information, special application requirements. B. Show Drawings: Provide scale drawings indicating panel sizes and locations, including standard panel widths. Include details of edge conditions and rear mounting hardware. 1. Provide details showing the installation of stretched fabric wall systems as flush with the installation of back-painted glass or whiteboard panels. C. Verification Samples: 24 by 24 inch samples of completed fabric system assembly mounted to an acoustical core substrate using specified mounting system. Sample shall illustrate selected edging profile, facing fabric, fill components, and mounting system. 1. Sample shall also illustrate whether the color of acoustical core material shows through panel fabric. If color of acoustical material does show, re-fabricate acoustical material such that color of core material does not show through panel fabric and resubmit completed fabric system. D. Maintenance Information: Fabric maintenance data and recommended cleaning materials, and cleaning and stain removal methods. E. Compatibility of Fabric and Track System: Submit evidence that fabric is compatible with track system. F. Schedule: Provide “Installation Schedule” showing location for each panel. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Stretched-Fabric Wall Systems 09 77 13 - 2 G. Certificate of Compliance: 1. Manufacturer shall submit notarized certificate indicating compliance with requirements of specifications and that specified warranty will be provided without restriction. 2. Authorization for Deviations From Specifications: If any deviations from specifications have been accepted, include written description and reasons for deviations. Include authorization for change signed by Owner, Architect and person submitting change. Authorization for change shall also clearly indicate party responsible for-remedying defects, including costs of related trades and design professional's time. 3. Certification of Code Compliance: Manufacturer shall certify that materials proposed for use comply with applicable building code and environmental regulations. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain framing, infill materials, and mounting system from a single manufacturer. Manufacturer shall be responsible for coordination of proper selection of materials and fabrics for end use intended. B. Verify Owner furnished fabric conforms to standards established by system manufacturer for the intended application, and are in compliance with specified flame spread and acoustical requirements. 1. Specified manufacturer of fabric shall engage and pay for the services of a qualified independent testing laboratory, to perform testing of specified panel assemblies with owner furnished materials, which have not been previously tested for compliance to the specified requirements. 2. Testing laboratory shall be acceptable to the Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. C. Notify the Architect where conflicts apply between referenced standards and existing materials, and existing methods of construction. D. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 3 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein, and approved by product manufacturer. E. Coordination: Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for installing inserts and anchorages furnished by this Section; make arrangements for delivery, receipt and installation of inserts and anchorages to prevent delay of the Work. F. Field Measurements: Take field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of Work. Allow for adjustments within specified tolerances wherever taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay Work. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver items to the site, until all specified submittals have been submitted to, and approved by, the Architect. B. Do not deliver fabric panel materials to the project until wet work has been completed and is dry. C. Store materials inside, under cover, and in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and other causes. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Stretched-Fabric Wall Systems 09 77 13 - 3 D. Do not install fabric materials until environment similar to final environment has been established and will be maintained. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Stretched-fabric wall systems shall comply with "Surface- Burning Characteristics" or "Fire Growth Contribution" Subparagraph below, or both, as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency on systems prepared according to ASTM E 2573. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 200 or less. 2. Fire Growth Contribution: Comply with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 286. B. Acoustical Rating: Panel system tested in accordance with ASTM C423 with a resultant Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) of 0.85 per inch of acoustical core. 2.02 STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEMS A. Track System: "2 SE 20” as manufactured by FabriTRAK Systems, Inc.. 1. Panel Size: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Panel Profile: 2 Inch 3. Reveals between Panels: TBD by Architect. 4. Edge Details: TBD by Architect. 5. Acoustical Performance: Sound absorption NRC of not less than 0.80 according to ASTM C 423 for Type A mounting according to ASTM E 795. B. Core Material: Provide TerraCore Poly as manufactured by FabriTrak. C. Frame Construction: Extruded plastic formed to hold fabric in tension, with dimensions and edge profile as, shown on the drawings, 100-durometer rigid-PVC extruded track and flexible hinge, 1/2 in. overall height designed to close and lock fabric in place. D. Mounting Accessories: Mechanical fasteners and other attachment components as required by the manufacturer for concealed fastening of panel frames and core materials for applications indicated. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Stretched-Fabric Wall Systems 09 77 13 - 4 2.03 FACING MATERIAL A. General: Fabric shall be tested for suitability and stability. Proper backing shall be applied if needed. B. Panel Fabrics: Subject to compliance with performance and sustainability requirements, provide panel fabric: 1. As indicated on Finish Schedule C. Match Architect’s approved samples. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all substrate surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. B. Verify gypsum board surface is within specified tolerances and has been taped, sanded smooth and primed. C. Verify electrical receptacles, switchboxes and other similar wall penetrations have been sealed to prevent air leakage. D. Ensure that work which will be concealed by Work of this Section, has been permanently installed, inspected and approved. E. Notify Architect in writing when project conditions are unacceptable to fabric system prior to installation. Installation means acceptance of substrate and project conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with system manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified herein. B. Install in accordance with approved “Installation Schedule”. Refer to Part 1 “Submittals” of this Section. C. Where installed adjacent to plastic laminate whiteboard panels, fabric wrapped panels shall be installed flush with whiteboard panels. D. Framework: 1. Framework shall be installed around perimeter of each panel area. To greatest extent possible, install members in continuous lengths. 2. Install framework shimmed, plumbed, and scribed to align with adjacent surfaces. Attach in a manner to prevent sagging or moving out of position after fabric has been stretched tightly. Framework members shall not telescope through face of fabric. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Stretched-Fabric Wall Systems 09 77 13 - 5 3. Secure framework to wall surface using pneumatically driven 18 gauge staples with a diverging head to form divergent-tine wall anchors spaced at 2-3" on center. 4. Provide framework flush with face of panel around outlet boxes, duplex receptacles, thermostats, etc., which may occur within fabric panel area. E. Core Materials: 1. Materials shall be installed in a continuous manner, flush and level with framework. Material shall be tight to the framework at all points. 2. Materials shall be installed using a suitable method of mechanical fastening. Adhesives are not to be acceptable for use when installing core materials to substrate. F. Fabric Facing: 1. Cut fabric from each roll maintaining sequence of drops and matching direction of weave for sequential and uniform installation. 2. Install fabric with warp and weft threads plumb, level, and true. Patterns, textures, and grain of fabric shall be aligned and matched at seams. Throughout entire seam, join wall panels without distortion to geometry of fabric or pattern. 3. Fabric shall be stretched, re-stretched, and tensioned over framework and left to atmospherically cure for a minimum of 24 hours between stretchings until sufficiently taught to avoid sagging under varying year-round temperature and humidity conditions. 4. Installed fabric shall be stretched taut so as not to puddle or dent when touched or leaned upon. Fabric shall be self-healing when pushed, punched, or hit, and shall revert back to original finished condition. 5. Fabric shall be applied securely to grounds using a hand tool appropriate for joint condition and nature of fabric. No nailing, tacking, stapling, adhesive taping, or gluing of fabric shall be permitted. Ensure that fabric surface is free of wrinkles and that weave is plumb and straight and properly aligned horizontally and vertically. G. Installation of stretched fabric wall systems shall be flush with the installation of back-painted glass. Install in accordance with approved Shop Drawings. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Panels From True Location: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. B. Maximum Variation of Surfaces Intended to be Flush: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation of Reveal Width: Plus or minus 1/16 Inch. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under the provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Remove and replace panels which are damaged, soiled or are otherwise found unacceptable to Architect. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Stretched-Fabric Wall Systems 09 77 13 - 6 3.05 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Adjust panels dislodged from indicated position, plumb and level. B. Daily clean work areas by sweeping and disposing of debris and scraps. C. Upon completion of the work of this Section, remove tools, equipment and all rubbish and debris from the work area; leave area in broom-clean condition. D. Clean surfaces of fabric panels free from dirt and handling marks using methods and materials recommended by panel system manufacturer. Fabric surfaces which cannot be cleaned, or which are otherwise damaged shall be removed and replaced with new work in conformance with the Contract Documents. E. Protect panels from soiling or other damage, until Final Acceptance of Contract by Owner. END OF SECTION February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Painting 09 91 23 - 1 SECTION 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates; 1. Gypsum board (Exposed surfaces). 2. Hollow metal doors and frames. 3. Exposed structural steel, piping and ductwork. 4. Other surfaces specified and/or shown on Drawings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications” for shop priming [and finishing] of metal fabrications. 2. Division 06 Section “Interior Architectural Woodwork” for shop finishing of architectural woodwork. 3. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames” for shop primed hollow metal doors and frames. 4. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies”. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Detailed Painting Schedule: Submit a "Painting Schedule" for review by the Architect. Prepare this schedule on the basis of the surfaces, types of paint materials, number of coats required, and list the brand name of the product of the manufacturer proposed for each use. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. E. Coordination of Submittals: Prior to submittal of product and samples coordinate gloss and environmental requirements with actual proposed manufacturers and architects samples. Ensure that MPI numbers coincide correctly with gloss defined by architect, and each specific manufacturer’s product.1 February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Painting 09 91 23 - 2 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation and Workmanship Standards: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for paint systems specified. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver paint materials to the job site in original containers and packages, bearing the manufacturer's labels, indicating name, type, brand, contents by volume, for pigment, vehicle and volatile constituents. Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, deliver paints ready-mixed. Order in advance in large enough quantities and in ample time to facilitate the Work. B. Store materials and equipment in tightly covered containers in a designated storage space on the site. 1. Space shall be well-ventilated with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 2. Keep storage space neat, clean and accessible. 3. Protect floors from paint spillage. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not paint when the air is dust-laden nor when weather and temperature conditions are unsuitable. Maintain temperatures within the building at a minimum of 60 degrees F during the painting and drying periods. 1.06 PROTECTION A. Place paint or solvent soaked rags, waste or other materials which might constitute a fire hazard in metal containers and remove from premises at the close of each day's work. Take every precaution to avoid damage by fire. B. Provide suitable coverings to protect surfaces not requiring painting. C. Remove or protect items such as hardware, hardware accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items placed prior to painting. Reposition or remove protection upon completion of each space. Disconnect equipment adjacent to walls by workmen skilled in these trades to permit painting of wall surfaces; replace and reconnect after completion of painting. D. Maintain wrappings or other factory applied protection furnished with finish hardware (or other items provided by other trades) installed in areas where painting is required. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Painting 09 91 23 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 2.02 INTERIOR PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer; No. N534. 2. PPG Paints; Speedhide Zero Interior Latex Primer; No. 6-4900XI. 3. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar 200 0 VOC Primer B28W02600. 2.03 INTERIOR PAINTS A. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Flat): 1. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Ultra Spec 500 Flat Finish, No. N536. 2. PPG Paints; Pure Performance - Interior Flat Latex, No. 9-110X1 Series. 3. The Sherwin-Williams Company: ProMar 200 Latex Flat, B30-12600 Series. B. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Eggshell): 1. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Ultra Spec 500 Eggshell Finish, No. N538. 2. PPG Paints; Pure Performance - Interior Eggshell Latex, No. 9-310X1 Series. 3. The Sherwin-Williams Company: ProMar 200 Latex Low Gloss Eg-Shel, B41-2600 Series. C. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Semigloss): 1. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Ultra Spec 500 Semi-Gloss Finish, No. N539. 2. PPG Paints; Pure Performance - Interior Semi-Gloss Latex, No. 9-510X1 Series. 3. The Sherwin-Williams Company: ProMar 200 Latex Semi-Gloss, B31-2600 Series. D. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Waterborne Alkyd (High Gloss – Lacquer Finish): 1. Benjamin Moore & Co.; ADVANCE® High Gloss Finish, No. N794. 2. PPG Paints; Speedhide Water Borne Alkyd Gloss 6-1610 Series. E. Refer to Finish Schedule. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Painting 09 91 23 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Painting 09 91 23 - 5 1. SSPC-SP 2 – Hand Tool Cleaning. 2. SSPC-SP 3 – Power Tool Cleaning. 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4 – Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. 4. SSPC-SP 11 – Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. I. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. J. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces to be coordinated with MEP work. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Painting 09 91 23 - 6 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.05 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE F. Paint interior surfaces exposed to view in accordance with this Schedule of Interior Painting, except as specifically shown or specified. G. Steel Substrates: Acrylic coating. 1. Prime Coat: Acrylic steel primer. 2. Intermediate Coat: Acrylic coating matching topcoat. 3. Topcoat: Acrylic coating (semigloss). H. Steel Substrates: Latex. 1. Prime Coat: Rust-inhibitive primer (water based). 2. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. 3. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex (semigloss). I. Primed Steel Substrates: 1. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. 2. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex (semigloss). J. Gypsum Board Substrates: i. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. ii. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. iii. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex flat and eggshell. K. Piping and Mechanical Equipment: Paint piping, pipe hangers and supports, heat exchangers, tanks, ductwork, insulation, motors, electrical conduits, switchgear and other mechanical and electrical equipment except equipment which is non-ferrous metal, plated, finished by manufacturers, permanently concealed or noted to be painted under other Sections. Properly clean, prepare and finish as specified. Paint materials shall be heat-resisting type when applied to heating lines and equipment. 1. Uninsulated Piping Ductwork, Fittings and Equipment February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Interior Painting 09 91 23 - 7 a. 1st Coat: Enamel Undercoater b. 2nd Coat: Eggshell Enamel 2. Insulated Piping, Ductwork, Fittings and Equipment a. 1st Coat: Latex Flat b. 2nd Coat: Latex Semi-Gloss L. Pipe Identification: 1. Comply with ANSI A13.1 "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems". 2. Provide plastic coated fabric pipe markers, "All-Temperature" labels (W.H. Brady), or approved equal. Indicate the pipe contents in printed, block letters. Provide labels as to completely circumscribe the pipe and overlap not less than 1 inch upon one edge. 3. Provide flow markers consisting of labels similar to the pipe markers with a large black arrow printed on the same background color to indicate the direction of flow of material in the pipe. 4. On each side of walls or floors through which pipes pass, place a pipe marker and a flow marker on each pipe. Place markers adjacent to valves and fittings. For exposed piping locate markers to be clearly visible to a person standing on the floor. 5. On pipes or covering 1 inch and smaller in diameter requiring identifying markings, attach metal tag of not less than 1 inch in diameter, with lettering etched and filled with enamel, in lieu of stencils. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Visual Display Boards 10 11 16 - 1 SECTION 10 11 00.16 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass marker boards. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of visual display board indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for visual display surfaces. B. Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. Include plans, dimensioned elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: 12 inch square panels of each type of visual display unit in the selected color. Where color has not been selected, provide color charts showing the full range of colors and textures available. D. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's standard cleaning and maintenance instructions. E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display unit through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Visual display units shall be packed in wooden crates for shipment to site. B. Delivery: Deliver factory-built visual display surfaces, including factory-applied trim where indicated, completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. C. Storage and Protection: Store panels vertically in wooden shipping crates in a protected temperature controlled environment prior to installation. Excessive heat, cold, or humidity are not acceptable. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Visual Display Boards 10 11 16 - 2 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s standard five (5) year warranty for replacement/repair of materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GLASS MARKER BOARDS A. Glass Marker Board Types: Frameless Magnetic Glass Board” as manufactured by INKFLO: 1. Edges: Smooth polished edge with eased corners. 2. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Color: Refer to Finish Schedule 5. Accessories: Eraser and 4 colored marking pens. B. Mounting: In accordance with Manufacturer’s written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that the adjacent substrates are ready to receive the work of this Section. B. Surfaces to receive visual display units shall be free of dirt, scaling paint, and projections or depressions that would affect smooth, finished surfaces of visual display units. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install visual display units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation. 3.04 CLEAN-UP A. Clean surfaces after installation in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. C. Cover and protect visual display surfaces after installation and cleaning. END OF SECTION February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Demountable Metal and Glass Partitions 10 22 19 - 1 SECTION 10 22 19 DEMOUNTABLE METAL AND GLASS PARTITIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Unitized glass front demountable partitions and doors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 08 Section “Glazing Film”. 2. Division 09 Section “Acoustical Ceiling Panels”. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit plans, elevations, and sections; attachment details at floors, columns, permanent partitions, and ceilings; and method of erection and disassembly. Show details of connections to building and ceiling for project specific locations. Provide Details for: 1. Corner sample of frame, and glazing beads showing materials, finish, and construction. 2. Hardware: Each item required. 3. Coordination Drawings: Partial reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which penetration and ceiling mounted items are shown and coordinated with demountable partitions. 4. Submit documentation for STC value. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog sheets, specifications, and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finishes required, provide a sample as noted. 1 Linear Metal Trim: 6 inches long with painted finish. 2. Glazing Manufactures’ standard size unit, but not less than 3 inches square. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Owner's manual, hardware operation, instructions for cleaning and handling demountable system and glass, and touching-up finishes. F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for sound ratings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications, Responsibility and Certification: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Glass partition manufacturer to have minimum five years documented experience in the fabrication of glass partitions of the type required for this project and be capable of providing field service representation during installation. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Demountable Metal and Glass Partitions 10 22 19 - 2 2. Installer: The Contractor shall have been engaged in the installation of work of this character for at least 5 years and shall submit evidence of several satisfactory installations completed by him in the last 2 years. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver partitions in sturdy, protective crates or containers. B. Store and handle materials and components in a manner that will not cause damage to the finish in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 1.05 SEQUENCING A. Ensure that locating templates and other information required for installation of products of this section are furnished to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress. B. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. B. Field Measurements: Verify opening dimensions of all-glass partitions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate the measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of adjacent surfaces to avoid damage to installed materials. B. Coordinate work with adjacent floor, wall, and ceiling construction to accommodate frame anchorage, track, and concealed hardware. C. Coordinate work with concrete floors and floor finishes for adequate tolerances and clearances between panels and floor finish. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Glass manufacturer shall warrantee its glass product for 1 year against discoloration and fingerprints under normal conditions and when proper cleaning and handling instructions have been followed. Manufacturer will conduct tests to determine the cause of defects relative to warranty. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Demountable Metal and Glass Partitions 10 22 19 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: 1. Partition system shall not be load bearing and shall not be subject to or create a vertical load on the ceiling system. 2. System shall be capable of supporting glass and doors at the heights indicated. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. C. Acoustical Performance: Where acoustical rating is indicated, provide demountable-partition assembly tested by a qualified testing agency for sound transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, calculated according to ASTM E 413. STC value: 38. D. Regulatory Requirements: Provide tempered or laminated glass for locations subject to human impact as required by the applicable Building Code. 2.02 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS A. Partition System: “Stratus” unitized, dual glazed, demountable-partition assembly by Skywalls Architectural Wall Systems. B. Components: Provide movable glazed walls of type and size as shown on the Drawings complete with ceiling clips, continuous ceiling channels, factory glazed panels with unitized base, reveal feature strips, swinging doors, anchorage and accessories for a complete and stable installation. 1. Glass Swinging Doors: Manufacturer's standard 1/2 inch thick full height fully tempered clear float glass door in anodized aluminum frame. 2. Door Frame: Clear anodized aluminum hinged frames with stops at the jambs and head, and a continuous seal around the door. 3. Glazed Panels: Clear anodized aluminum frames with fully tempered clear float glass, 1/2 inch thick. 4. Post: 2-way posts as required. C. Aluminum: Profiles and framing fabricated from aluminum extrusions of alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for intended use and required for application of finish indicated, but not less than strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 for 6063-T5ASTM B 221 for 6063-T5. D. Glass Materials: 1. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Kind FT (fully tempered), Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class and condition indicated. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch for partitions up to 10 feet high. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Demountable Metal and Glass Partitions 10 22 19 - 4 3. Edge Treatment: Machine ground and polished edges for exposed glass edges of doors and butting glass edges. 4. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section “Glass Glazing”. E. Sealant for Butt-Glazing: Single-Component, Nonsag, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses NT, G, and A. F. Hardware: Coordinate with hardware as specified under Division 08 Section “Door Hardware”. 1. Lockset: Manufacturers standard lever handled mortised lock box with brushed stainless steel finish. a. Offices: Privacy function. b. Conference Rooms: Passage function. 2. Pivot Hinges: Manufacturers standard pivot hinges at top and bottom. 3. Floor Stop: Manufacturers standard domed floor stop. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate demountable walls for installation with concealed fastening devices and pressure-fit members that will not damage ceiling or floor coverings. Fabricate systems for installation with continuous seals at floor, ceiling, and other locations where partitions abut fixed construction. B. Panels for Unitized-Panel Demountable Partitions: Flush, unitized-panel construction; with faces smooth and free of buckles, oil canning, and seams; and insulated with solidly packed, inorganic, mineral filler. 1. Locate and provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware before tempering glass. Do not permit cutting, drilling or other alterations to glass after tempering. 2. Fabricate work to accommodate required fittings, hardware, anchors, reinforcement, and accessory items. C. Pre-Fabrication: Fabricate, assemble, finish, and complete hardware application and other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 2.04 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Demountable Metal and Glass Partitions 10 22 19 - 5 1.05 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC- SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive metal and glass partitions for defects that will adversely affect the execution and quality of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify wall openings are ready to receive work of this section. C. Verify concealed overhead structural supports are sized and located properly. D. Insure finished floor under operable glass partition is level plus or minus 1/4 inch. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Demountable Metal and Glass Partitions 10 22 19 - 6 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install demountable partitions in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions after other finishing operations have been completed. 1. Install partitions rigid, level, plumb, and aligned. Install seals at connections with floors, ceilings, fixed walls, and abutting surfaces to prevent light and sound transmission. 2. Except for filler panels scribed to fixed walls or columns, do not modify manufacturer's standard components. B. Install ceiling clips after installation of ceiling grid. Install ceiling channel into clips and secure in place. If ceiling panels have a tegular edge, install foam seal between ceiling “tee”, ceiling panels, and ceiling channel to provide an acoustical seal prior to setting panels. C. Install the factory glazed and unitized panels around the ceiling channel, plumb the panels, and release set screws to allow spring loaded base to lift panels to the appropriate reveal height. Level and tighten set screws. D. Accurately fit and secure joints and intersections. E. Doors and Frames: Install door-and-frame and glazing-and-glazing-frame assemblies securely anchored to partitions and with doors aligned and fitted. Install and adjust door hardware for proper operation. F. Erection Tolerances: 1. Floor and Ceiling: +/- 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). 2. Panel to Panel: Install each demountable partition so surfaces vary not more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent partitions. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and tight closure. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. B. Adjust doors for smooth operation throughout full operating range. C. Clean glass promptly after completion of installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. END OF SECTION February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 10 22 39 - 1 SECTION 10 22 39 VERTICALLY FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrically operated, vertical folding partitions. 2. Finish of acoustical panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications” for supports that attach supporting tracks to overhead structural system. 2. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for ceiling storage pockets, fire-rated assemblies and sound barrier construction above the ceiling at track. 3. Division 26 Electrical and Communications Sections for electrical service and connections for motor operators, controls, and limit switches and for system disconnect switches. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturers’ product data for each type of product specified. 2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing complete layout of folding partitions based on field verified dimensions. The drawings shall include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware, track, and blocking. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 3. Samples: Provide samples for each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing. B. Informational submittals: 1. Qualification Data: For qualified [Installer] [testing agency] [manufacturer] [and] [vendor]. 2. Product Certificates: For each type of folding partition. Include approval letter signed by manufacturer acknowledging Owner-furnished panel facing material (if any) complies with requirements. 3. Sample Warranty: Manufacturer's special warranty. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide operations and maintenance data for inclusion in maintenance manuals. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 10 22 39 - 2 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. C. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. D. ISO Certification: The folding partition shall be manufactured by a certified ISO-9001-2000 company or an equivalent quality control system. E. Preconstruction Conference: Prior to the start of the Work, and at the Contractor’s direction, meet at the Project site to review methods and sequence of Work, special details and conditions, standard of workmanship, and other pertinent topics related to the Work. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Faulty operation of folding panel partitions. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated: 1. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than an STC of not less than System STC of 60, and Panel Construction STC of 66. 2. Noise-Isolation Requirements: Installed operable panel partition assembly, identical to partition tested for STC, tested for NIC according to ASTM E 336, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for 10 dB less than STC value indicated. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 10 22 39 - 3 B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes complying with one of the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size. 2. Pass doors in fire-rated operable panel partition assemblies shall meet positive-pressure requirements. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.02 VERTICALLY FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS A. Basis-of-Design Product: “Skyfold® Zenith® 60” Automatic Vertically Retractable Acoustic Walls as manufactured by Skyfold Inc. of Baie d’Urfe (Montréal), Québec, Canada. 1. Panel Weight: 8.6 lb./sq. ft. maximum. 2. Panel Thickness: Overall thickness of dual panel system is 11-3/4 inches (299 mm). 3. Panel Height: 26-1/2 inches. 4. Joint Width: Vertical and horizontal joints between panels shall be no greater than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide. 5. STC Ratings: System STC 60, Panel construction STC 66. B. Panel Operation: Electrically operated, continuously hinged panels that fold upward (vertically) into a pocket in the ceiling with the following features: 1. Wall panels shall fold and unfold at the exact same time and at the exact same rate. 2. From a fully open position, the wall shall be able to go through its entire cycle of closing and/or opening without any manual intervention. 3. When the operable wall is lowered (closed) it shall come automatically to rest once it has reached the fully down (closed) position. 4. When the operable wall is lifted (opened) it shall come automatically to rest once it has reached the fully up (open) position. 5. The operable wall shall automatically and acoustically seal against the floor without the need for any manual intervention. The floor seals shall leave a joint between the floor and the bottom acoustical panels of not more than approximately 2” (51 mm). 6. The operable wall shall automatically and acoustically seal against the two end walls without the need for any manual intervention. The end seals shall act in such a way as not to come into contact with the end walls while the operable wall is in motion. The end seals shall leave a joint between the acoustical panels and the end walls of no more than approximately 1” (25 mm). Seals shall not rub or brush against the end walls. Once the wall reaches the full down position, the end seals shall activate automatically. The key switch shall be held for the duration of the operation. 7. The operable wall shall automatically and acoustically seal against the ceiling without any manual intervention. The top seals shall leave a joint between the top acoustical panels and the ceiling of the pocket of not more than approximately 2” (51 mm). 8. The operable wall shall open and close at a constant nominal speed of approximately 5 to 10 vertical feet per minute (1.5 to 3 meters per minute). February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 10 22 39 - 4 9. When the operable wall is being lowered (closed), it shall stop if the leading (bottom) edge comes into firm contact with any object between it and the floor. The regular operation of the wall shall resume once the key switch has been released and the direction of the wall has been reversed and the obstruction removed. 10. The operable wall shall be visibly flat and rigid in the down (closed) position. 11. All of the panel edges shall be right angled, with a minimum radius not more than 1/16” (1.6 mm). 2.03 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities. In the down (closed) position, the partition shall be comprised of two vertical planes of acoustical panels, separated by an acoustical air space panels. B. Dimensions: Panels shall be rectangular and nominally of the same size. Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements. C. Panel Materials: Non-combustible. 1. Steel Face Sheets: Tension-leveled galvanized steel sheet, minimum of 0.032-inch (0.81- mm) thick. 2. Steel Liner Sheets: Tension-leveled galvanized steel sheet, minimum of 0.040-inch (1.02- mm) thick. 3. Panel Core: Manufacturer’s standard. 4. Sound Insulation: Fiberglass blankets adhered to each panel of thickness required to meet STC ratings. D. Folding Mechanism: 1. Materials: The hanging, folding and extension mechanism shall be constructed of structural grade aluminum extrusions and structural shapes. 2. Wear Surfaces: Bushings, spacers, pins, discs, bearings, and sleeves shall be designed to function quietly with minimum wear over the 10,000 cycle design life of the operable wall. 3. Hangers: The hangers that fasten the lifting mechanism to the supporting steel shall be fabricated from steel and shall be welded or bolted to the structural steel support. 6. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard concealed (invisible) hinges. 2.04 SEALS A. General: Provide seals that produce operable panel partitions complying with performance requirements. B. Vertical Seals: Rubber-faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on wall when extended, ensuring vertical sealing and resisting panel movement. 1. Extension and retraction of bottom seal automatically operated by movement of partition, with operating range not less than 1 inch (25 mm) between retracted seal and wall finish. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 10 22 39 - 5 C. Horizontal Seals: Nesting, interlocking steel on each edge of panel, with continuous rubber acoustical seal. D. Horizontal Top and Bottom Seals: Continuous rubber constant-force-contact seal exerting uniform constant contact on floor and ceiling when panels are in the open position, and ensuring horizontal sealing and resisting panel movement. 2.05 ELECTRIC OPERATORS A. General: Factory-assembled electric operation system of size and capacity recommended and provided by operable panel partition manufacturer for partition specified; with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, speed reducer, chain drive, control stations, control devices, and accessories required for operation. Include wiring from control stations to motor. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with building electrical system. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Control Equipment: Comply with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6. B. Motor Electrical Characteristics: 1. Horsepower: 1 hp. 2. Volts: 208. 3. Phase: 3 phase. 4. Hertz: 60. C. Control Stations: Two (2) single-key-operated, constant-pressure control stations located remotely from each other on opposite sides and opposite ends of partition. Wire in series to require simultaneous activation of both key stations to operate partition. Each three-position control station labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop". Furnish two keys per station. D. Obstruction-Detection Devices: Equip each motorized panel partition with indicated automatic safety sensor that causes operator to immediately [shut off motor] [stop and reverse direction]. E. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop operable panel partition at fully extended and fully stacked positions. F. Emergency Release Mechanism: Quick disconnect-release of electric-motor drive system, permitting manual operation in event of operating failure. 2.04 PANEL FINISH FACINGS A. General: Provide finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire-test-response characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing, using mildew-resistant non-staining adhesive as recommended by facing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply one-piece, seamless facings free of air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects, [with edges tightly butted, and] [with invisible seams complying with Shop Drawings for location, and] with no gaps or overlaps. Horizontal or vertical [butted edges] [seams] are not permitted. Tightly secure and conceal raw and selvage edges of facing for finished appearance. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 10 22 39 - 6 2. Where facings with [directional or repeating patterns or directional weave] [directional, repeating, or matching grain] are indicated, mark facing top and attach facing in same direction. B. Vinyl-Coated Fabric Wall Covering at Training Room “WC-3”: “Abstract ACW-53401 Porcelain #1” by Arc Com. 1. Medium Duty: Type II; total weight of 20 oz. per sq. yd. 2. Content: 100% vinyl. 3. Width: 54 inches. 4. Backing: Recycled, non-woven. 5. Repeat: 54" Horizontal Match, 12-5⁄8" Vertical Repeat. 6. Stain-Resistant: Clear polyvinyl fluoride film not less than 0.0005 inch (1/2 mil) thick conforming to Federal Specification L-P-1040 as a top coating. In addition to ASTM D1308 staining agents, provide material which is stain-resistant to asphalt, ball point pen ink, lipstick, crayon, and merthiolate. There shall be no perceptible staining or bleaching of coating after 24 hour covered spot test and removal with solvent, water or cleaning agents. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate on One Side of Cafeteria Partition “PL-9”: NEMA LD 3, “Nevamar Armored Protection” by Nevamar Company, LLC; a division of Panolam Industries International, Inc. 1. Color: Studio Grey. 2. Texture: Textured/Suede. D. Fabric Wall Covering on Other Side of Cafeteria Partition “UP-1”: “Carnegie Zorel Strie” by Carnegie Fabrics, LLC. 1. Contents: 100% Zorel. 2. Width: 54 inches. 3. Weight: 12 oz./lin. yd. 4. Color: 809. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable panel partitions. B. Confirm in writing to the General Contractor or contract manager any deviations from these tolerances. Do not proceed until these conditions have been corrected. C. Take appropriate field measurements before manufacturing any components or assemblies. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 10 22 39 - 7 B. Install partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation. C. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels or gasketing, or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable. D. Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure of vertical joints and full closure along top and bottom seals.[ Perform test and make adjustments before NIC testing.] 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Clean panels of any dirt, oil, grime, etc., that may have found its way onto the acoustical panels. Leave the wall in a state of architectural cleanliness. 3.04 Demonstration A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Toilet and Bath Accessories 10 28 00 - 1 SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Toilet accessories. 2. Childcare accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 06 Section “Interior Architectural Woodwork” for vanities to receive toilet accessories. 2. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for Sanitary Joint Sealers. 3. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for concealed mounting plate reinforcement for grab bars. 4. Division 09 Section "Tiling" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories. 5. Division 11 Section “Pantry Equipment” for pantry equipment. 6. Division 22 “Plumbing Sections” for plumbing fixtures and fittings. 7. Division 27 “Communication Sections” for call for aid devices. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory specified. B. Samples: When requested submit samples of materials specified herein for approval, and obtain approval before materials are delivered to the site. C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify accessories using designations indicated. D. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices. E. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations. 1.03 FOCUS PRODUCTS A. Metal Toilet and Bathroom Accessories February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Toilet and Bath Accessories 10 28 00 - 2 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. Whenever a conflict arises, consult the Architect as to which requirements shall apply. 1.05 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery with the work of other trades so as not to delay the job process. B. Protection: Use means necessary to protect the materials of this section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of other trades. C. Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Accessibility: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and the [New York State Building Code] [New Jersey Law Against Discrimination (LAD)] [Connecticut State Building Code]. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Source Limitations: Provide products of the same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed in the same areas, except where other specific products are indicated in the of “Toilet Accessories Schedule”, or unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. D. Manufacturer’s Identification: No stamped, printed, or other manufacturer identification shall appear on the exposed surfaces of accessories furnished under this section. 2.02 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturer’s: Toilet room accessories, as listed by catalog or model number and manufacturer in the Schedule of Accessories, refer to the products of the manufacturer listed for the purpose of establishing a standard of quality, construction, appearance, function, size design, finish and properties. Similar products of the following manufacturers may be submitted for approval to the Architect if requirements specified herein are met. Provide toilet room accessories from a single manufacturer, to the greatest extent possible, to provide undivided responsibilities for this work. 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Co. 2. Toto USA Inc. 3. Dolphin Solutions Ltd. 4. Kohler Company 5. American Dispenser Co., Inc. 6. Bradley Washroom Equipment. B. Provide products of the same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed in the same areas, except where other specific products are indicated in the Schedule of February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Toilet and Bath Accessories 10 28 00 - 3 Accessories, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. C. No stamped, printed, or other manufacturer identification shall appear on the exposed surfaces of accessories furnished under this section. 2.03 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIES A. Refer to Schedule on page G-900.00 2.04 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product manufactured by Koala Kare Products, or a product approved equal by one of the following: 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Brocar Products, Inc. B. Diaper-Changing Station: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Model No. KB110-SSRE; Koala Kare Products. 2. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with child- protection strap. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches (100 mm) from wall when closed. 4. Operation: Concealed pneumatic cylinder and hinge structure 5. Material and Finish: 18 guage, type 304 satin stainless steel finish, HDPE with Microban antimicrobial interior. 6. Liner Dispenser: Built in. 2.05 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. Exposed surfaces of stainless steel shall receive a No. 4 satin finish as approved by the Architect. B. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), applied over a coating of nickel. On brass, the nickel coating shall be applied either directly to the base metal, or over a coating of copper. On steel, the nickel coating shall be applied over a coating of copper. Chrome plated surfaces shall receive a US26D finish, as approved by the Architect. Note that die-cast base metal is not acceptable. C. Fastening Devices: Anchors, clips, screws, bolts, expansion shields and plates shall be furnished with each accessory as required by the type of accessory and the construction to which it is attached, and shall be concealed where possible. Finish of exposed fastening devices shall match that of the accessory. Exposed to view fastening devices shall be tamper-resistant. D. Sound-Deadening Material: On back of recessed toilet room accessories shall be equal, as approved, to "Aquaplas" by H. L. Blachford, Inc. and shall be applied by spraying or troweling to a thickness of not less than 1/8 inch. E. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Toilet and Bath Accessories 10 28 00 - 4 2.06 FABRICATION A. Toilet Accessories: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. 1. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. B. Shower Enclosure: Shall be fabricated to the field measurements by a fabricator/installer authorized by the manufacturer, and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Field and shop seaming shall be waterproof and invisible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Templates: Furnish to the metal toilet partition Subcontractor templates required to locate drilled holes and cutouts. B. Coordinate with plumbing work. 3.03 INSTALLATION – TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Room/Pantry Accessories: Install accessories where indicated on Drawings and as directed by the Architect, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated, and in perfect alignment with other fixtures. C. Secure toilet room accessories using fasteners appropriate for each type of substrate indicated. 1. Use concealed fastenings wherever possible. 2. Install concealed mounting devices and fasteners fabricated of the same material as the accessories, or of galvanized steel, as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Use theft-resistant fasteners where exposed. Fasteners shall match the finish of the accessories. D. Metal Trim: Items exposed in the finished work shall be free from buckle, warping and oil-canning effects. Metal to metal contact shall have hairline joints. E. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Toilet and Bath Accessories 10 28 00 - 5 3.04 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Suitably protect the work to maintain finishes in perfect condition until final completion. Any damaged or defective work shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. C. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Fire Protection Specialties 10 44 00 - 1 SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: The work of this section shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 3. Brackets for fire extinguishers at kitchen. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies”. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's latest published literature for materials specified herein for approval, and obtain approval before materials are delivered to the site. B. Sustainability Submittals: Provide validation for each Submittals requirements of Division 01 Section “Sustainable Design and Construction” including a completed line item on the Sustainability Reporting Form for each Sustainability Focus Material. 1. Recycled Content. 2. Regional Materials. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials specified herein in manufacturer's unopened containers, with manufacturer's name and point of origin on each container. B. Handle and store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install work of this section until wet work in the space has been completed and is nominally dry, and until work above finish ceilings has been completed, and until ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers". February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Fire Protection Specialties 10 44 00 - 2 B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Fire extinguishers and cabinets are based on products by Larsen's Manufacturing Company. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. J.L. Industries, Inc. 2. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico. 3. Potter-Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. 4. Ansul, a Tyco International Company; Kitchen fire extinguishers. 2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Basis-of-Design Product: For non-rated construction provide “Vertical Duo” (baked enamel) "Occult" by Larsen's Manufacturing Company, or approved equal. Refer to Drawings: 1. Fully-Recessed Cabinets: Model No. O2409 B. Basis-of-Design Product in Fire-Rated Construction: For fire-rated construction provide “Vertical Duo” (stainless steel) "Architectural Series" by Larsen's Manufacturing Company. Refer to Drawings. 1. Fully-Recessed Cabinets: Model No. FS O2409 C. Cabinet Construction: Construct cabinets with walls fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 1. 1-hour Fire Rated Cabinets: Line cabinet with minimum 5/8-inch-(16-mm-) thick, fire-barrier material. 2. Trim Style and Projection: fully-recessed. 3. Inside Cabinet dimensions: 24 inches high by 9-1/2 inches wide. Depth: 6-1/4 inch non- rated; 6-7/8 inch rated. 4. Trim and Door Material: steel. 5. Door Style: Vertical Duo Clear Door. 6. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear). 7. Cabinet Box: Manufacturer’s standard; Steel, white baked enamel. 8. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. D. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: "Model No. 817". February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Fire Protection Specialties 10 44 00 - 3 2.04 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Multipurpose Fire Extinguishers (Dry Chemical): "Model No. MP10" by Larsen’s Manufacturing Company; UL-rated 4A-80B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg) nominal capacity, with mono ammonium phosphate- based dry chemical in enameled-steel container with pressure-indicating gage. B. Kitchen Fire Extinguishers (Wet Chemical): “K-GUARD® Model K01-2” Kitchen-Class Fire Extinguishers by Ansul, a Tyco International Company; UL-rated 1-A:K, 1.6-gal. (6-L) nominal capacity, with ANSULEX low pH agent in stainless-steel container with pressure-indicating gage. C. Characteristics: 1. Meets or exceeds requirements of UL Standard 8 and Standard 711. 2. Meets requirements of NFPA 10. 3. Bar coded nameplate. 4. Rechargeable. 5. Factory filled and pressurized. D. Mounting Brackets for Kitchen Fire Extinguishers: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel bracket, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. B. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate the work of this section with the work of other trades as required to complete the work of this section. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install fire extinguisher cabinets in strict accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Fire Protection Specialties 10 44 00 - 4 3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Upon completion, clean exposed surfaces and leave them in a condition entirely satisfactory to the Architect. B. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that are damaged or cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Pantry Equipment 11 31 13 - 1 SECTION 11 31 13 PANTRY EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Pantry Equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section “Interior Architectural Woodwork”. 2. Division 10 Section “Toilet Accessories”. 3. Division 22 “Plumbing” Sections. 4. Division 26 “Electrical” Sections. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pantry equipment specified herein shall be new factory shipped models. Floor and showroom models are prohibited. B. Items shall be furnished with applicable UL listing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's latest published literature, operating and maintenance manual for equipment specified herein shall be submitted for approval, and approval obtained before equipment is delivered to the site. 1. Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, and finishes for each appliance. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each appliance to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintains, within 25 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs. B. Source Limitations: Obtain appliances from single source and each type of appliance from single manufacturer unless noted otherwise. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver equipment in manufacturer's unopened containers, labeled with manufacturer's name and point of origin. Stack in accordance with manufactures instructions. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Pantry Equipment 11 31 13 - 2 B. Store equipment off the floor in a dry climate controlled environment. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within two years from date of Substantial Completion, except as qualified below. B. Appliance Warranties: Full warranty, including parts and labor; 1. Microwave Oven: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Refrigerator and Refrigerator/Freezer: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with applicable provisions in the DOJ's 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, the ADA standards of the local agency having jurisdiction, and ICC A117.1. 2.02 PANTRY EQUIPMENT A. Pantry Equipment: Refer to the “Pantry Equipment Schedule” on Drawing Sheet G-900. 2.03 FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protection: Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and performance of residential appliances. B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before appliance installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Pantry Equipment 11 31 13 - 3 D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. D. Coordinate installation of pantry equipment with other trades to provide for reception and installation of items pertaining to Architectural woodwork, plumbing, and electrical work. E. Clean work of this section and leave same in clean, undamaged condition, satisfactory to the Owner. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each manufacturer's appliance-performance parameters. 2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and components. B. Reports: Prepare test and inspection reports. An appliance will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Demonstration: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain appliances. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Roller Window Shades 12 24 13-1 SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers. 2. Motor-operated roller shades with double rollers. 3. Solar and blackout shade fabrics. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light-blocking shades with a sealant. 3. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies”. 4. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for motor operators, controls, limit switches, and other powered devices and for system disconnect switches for motorized shade operation. 5. Division 26 Section “Dimming Controls” for low-voltage control devices for shades provided as part of dimming system control stations. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections, details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings, attachments to other Work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work. 1. Motor-Operated Shades: Include details of installation and diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Complete, full-size operating unit not less than 16 inches wide for each type of roller shade indicated. 2. Shade Material: Not less than 3 inches square, with specified treatments applied. Mark face of material. D. Window Treatment Schedule: Include roller shades in schedule using same room designations indicated on Drawings. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Roller Window Shades 12 24 13-2 E. Product Certificates: For each type of roller shade product, signed by product manufacturer. F. Product Test Reports: For each type of roller shade product. G. Qualification Data: For Installer. H. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining roller shades and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics, finishes, and performance. 3. Operating hardware. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed installation of roller shades similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test- response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Roller Window Shades 12 24 13-3 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Rollers Shades: Before installation begins, for each size, color, texture, and pattern indicated, full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but not fewer than 4 units. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; corded-window requirements; lead content of components; and warning labels. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer. 2.03 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by DFB Sales. B. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated. 1. Bead Chains: Manufacturer's standard. a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. c. Chain-Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount. 2. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller shade weight and for lifting heavy roller shades. a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb (4.5 kg) or for shades as recommended by manufacturer, whichever criterion is more stringent. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Roller Window Shades 12 24 13-4 C. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service. 1. Roller Drive-End Location: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller. 3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method. D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated. E. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly. F. Shadebands: 1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. G. Installation Accessories: 1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. a. Shape: L-shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches (102 mm). 2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 3. Recessed Shade Pocket: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure designed for recessed ceiling installation; with front, top, and back formed as one piece, end plates, and removable bottom closure panel. a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than height indicated on Drawings. b. Provide pocket with lip at lower edge to support acoustical ceiling panel. 4. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation at bottom of site-constructed ceiling recess or pocket and for snap-in attachment to wall clip without fasteners. a. Closure-Panel Width: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades as shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other means of aligning shadebands with channels at tops. 6. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Roller Window Shades 12 24 13-5 bottoms of shades when shades are closed. 7. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.04 MOTOR-OPERATED, DOUBLE-ROLLER SHADES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by DFB Sales. B. Motorized Operating Systems: Provide factory-assembled, shade-operator systems of size and capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessories suitable for conditions indicated, complete with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, power disconnect switch, enclosures protecting controls and operating parts, and accessories required for reliable operation without malfunction. Include wiring from motor controls to motors. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with building electrical system. 1. Electrical Components: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Electric Motor: Manufacturer's standard tubular, enclosed in rollers. a. Electrical Characteristics: 110-V ac or 220-V ac. b. Maximum Total Shade Width: As required to operate roller shades indicated. c. Maximum Shade Drop: As required to operate roller shades indicated. d. Maximum Weight Capacity: As required to operate roller shades indicated. 3. Remote Control: Electric controls with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure for surface mounting. Provide the following for remote-control activation of shades: a. Keyed Control Station: Keyed, momentary-contact, three-position, switch-operated control station with open, close, and off functions. Provide two keys per station. b. Individual Switch Control Station: Momentary-contact, wall-switch-operated control station with open, close, and center off functions. 1) Switch Positions: Three. 2) Switch Style: Rocker. c. Group Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-position, rocker-style, wallswitch- operated control station with open, close, and center off functions for single-switch group control. d. Individual/Group Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-position, rockerstyle, wall-switch-operated control station with open, close, and center off functions for individual and group control. e. Sun Sensor Control: Adjustable system consisting of digital displays detecting sun intensity and responding by automatically adjusting shades. f. Infrared Control: System consisting of concealed receiver complete with external eye and connecting modular cable and two portable, multiple-channel transmitters with separate buttons to open and close individual or groups of shades, to open and close shades simultaneously, and to stop shade movement. 1) Capacity: Up to 12 individual or groups of shades. g. Timer Control: Clock timer, seven-day programmable for regular events. h. Microprocessor Control: Electronic programmable means for setting, changing, and adjusting control features; isolated from voltage spikes and surges. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Roller Window Shades 12 24 13-6 i. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Crank-Operator Override: Crank and gearbox operate shades in event of power outage or motor failure. 5. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to stop shade movement automatically at fully raised and fully lowered positions. 6. Operating Features: a. Group switching with integrated switch control; single faceplate for multiple switch cutouts. b. Capable of interface with audiovisual control system. c. Capable of accepting input from building automation control system. d. Override switch. C. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shades for service. 1. Double-Roller Mounting Configuration: Offset, outside shade over and inside shade under. 2. Inside Roller: a. Drive-End Location: As indicated on Drawings. b. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller. 3. Outside Roller: a. Drive-End Location: As indicated on Drawings. b. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller. 4. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method. D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller mounting configuration, roller assemblies, operating mechanisms, installation accessories, and installation locations and conditions indicated. E. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly. F. Inside Shadebands: 1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. G. Outside Shadebands: February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Roller Window Shades 12 24 13-7 1. Shadeband Material: Light-blocking fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. H. Installation Accessories: 1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. a. Shape: L-shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches (102 mm). 2. Exposed Headbox: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure including front fascia, top and back covers, endcaps, and removable bottom closure. a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches (102 mm). 3. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 4. Recessed Shade Pocket: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure designed for recessed ceiling installation; with front, top, and back formed as one piece, end plates, and removable bottom closure panel. a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 6 inches (152 mm). b. Provide pocket with lip at lower edge to support acoustical ceiling panel. 5. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation at bottom of site-constructed ceiling recesses or pockets and for snap-in attachment to wall clip without fasteners. a. Closure-Panel Width: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades as shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other means of aligning shadebands with channels at tops. 7. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at bottoms of shades when shades are closed. 8. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.05 FABRICS A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. B. “EcoVeil”, as manufactured by MechoShade: February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Roller Window Shades 12 24 13-8 1. Content: 100 TPO 2. Openness: 3 Percent 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. “AcoustiVeil Dimount”, as manufactured by MechoShade: 1. Content: 100 TPO 2. Openness: 3 Percent 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.06 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels. B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C): 1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or 1/2-inch (13-mm) total, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm). Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm). 2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings. C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible, except as follows: 1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material. 2. Skylight Shades: Provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband as required to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion or sag of material. 3. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the required width of shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as required by railroaded material to produce shadebands with full roll-width panel(s) plus, if required, one partial roll-width panel located at top of shadeband. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations of connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. February 28, 2020 Everest-Carmel, IN 11711 North Meridian Street City of Carmel, Clay Township Hamilton County, IN 46032 HLW Project # 19257 © 2020 HLW International LLP Roller Window Shades 12 24 13-9 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. B. Roller Shade Locations: As indicated on Drawings. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain motor-operated roller shades. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK Overview Ordering Format PART NUMBER: MX4-RF Size Lumens Direct Lumens Indirect CCT Available CRI Available 4 = 4 Feet 6 = 6 Feet 8 = 8 Feet 12 = 12 Feet CL = Custom Length D3 = 350 LPF D5 = 500 LPF D7 = 750 lpf D10 = 1000 LPF 27 = 2700 Kelvins 30 = 3000 Kelvins 35 = 3500 Kelvins 40 = 4000 Kelvins TW = Tunable White 2700-5000 Kelvins 80 = 80-85 CRI 90 = 90-95 CRI Optics Mounting Driver / Voltage Color Options FWF = Frosted White Flush T2 = 15/16 Flat Tee (Flat Tile) T2 = 9/16 Flat Tee (Tegular Tile) T1 = 9/16 Flat Tee (Tegular Tile) S = 9/16 Slot Grid Tee (Tegular Tile) S = 9/16 Interlude Tee (Tegular Tee) SF = Trimless F = Trim ND 1 = Non-Dim Universal 120VAC ND 2 = Non-Dim Universal 277VAC ZT 1 = 0-10v dimming 120v dual 1% ZT 2 = 0-10v dimming 277v dual 1% LE1 = Lutron EcoSystem 1% DLC EE CCR / PWM SoftOnFadeToBlack LE5 = Lutron EcoSystem 5% DLC EE CCR CC = Custom Control - Add in notes W = Standard White OS = Occupancy Sensor EMD = Emergency Driver - Battery Backup 120-277VAC L = L = Illuminated L Corner Section X = X = Illuminated Cross Section T = T= Iluminated T Section WH = Whip 6' ALVP = ALVP= Acrylic Lens in Vertical Position NOTES ORDER NUMBER: Flush 4 inch LED linear snap-in lens Sleek, slender contemporary design Easy to install T-Grid, S-Slot Grid, Tech Zone Ready Special - no light leak ends feature HOUSING OPTICS Picasso Lighting Industries, LLC | 46 Sellers Street, Kearny NJ 07032 | T 201.246.8188 F 201.246.8122 Max 4 Flush Lens RECESSED STANDARD TYPE PROJECT Construction & Mounting HOUSING Extruded Aluminum 4 ft., 6 ft., 8 ft., and 12 ft. REFLECTOR Integral powder-coated LED housing with excessive reflectivity for increased lumen output FINISH Standard powder-coated colors are white. Troffer style fixtures are not limited to white, consult factory for special applications. OPTICS Flush lens formulated for LED light sources. Snap-in/out lens removal. MOUNTING Our recessed fixtures are made to be mounted in S-slot grid, T-bar, Tech Zone . See mounting detail. Other ceiling types, please consult the factory, we can accommodate many different applications. Picasso Lighting Industries, LLC | 46 Sellers Street, Kearny NJ 07032 | T 201.246.8188 F 201.246.8122 Max 4 Flush Lens RECESSED STANDARD TYPE PROJECT Picasso Lighting Industries, LLC | 46 Sellers Street, Kearny NJ 07032 | T 201.246.8188 F 201.246.8122 Max 4 Flush Lens RECESSED STANDARD TYPE PROJECT Drivers - Our drivers are specifically selected based on Our LED drivers feature HPF (high power factor), Picasso Lighting Industries, LLC | 46 Sellers Street, Kearny NJ 07032 | T 201.246.8188 F 201.246.8122 Max 4 Flush Lens RECESSED STANDARD TYPE PROJECT Electrical / Driver LED Perfomance LED Output CCT Color Temp Watts Lumens Lumens per Watt CCT Multiplier Low 3000 3.8 WPF 350 LPF 92 2700=.95 Medium 3000 5.4 WPF 500 LPF 92 3000=1 High 3000 8 WPF 750 LPF 92 3500=1.01 Very High 3000 10.7 WPF 1000 LPF 92 4000/1.03 Certifications & Warranties Drivers - Our drivers are specifically selected based on fixture application to ensure ultimate reliability and long life. We use only UL recognized brands of LED drivers. Our LED drivers feature HPF (high power factor), universal voltage 110 - 277 VAC and include 0-10V dimming. Please note, 277v has longer distances from power feed to power feed then 120v. If required, we can supply premium drivers such as Lutron, Eldoled and others upon request. Advanced control systems compliant drivers such as POE,DALI, DMX, etc. are also available, please consult factory. Rated life (90% survivorship) of 50,000 hours at 50º C max. ambient (and 70º C max. case) temperature. At maximum driver load: Efficiency >84%, PF>0.9, THD POE - We are working with Molex/Igor POE systems. We can add a POE driver into our fixtures or remote them. Based on the fixture you select, we will notify you (or you can contact the factory) to see if we can install the P-driver or the P-driver needs to be remote. Just add POE1 in the spec and we will advise. Please keep in mind you need to specify a complete POE control system before specifying POE1. Our LED drivers feature HPF (high power factor), universal voltage 110 - 277 VAC and include 0-10V dimming. Emergency drivers are factory installed as an option, long life, high temperature, recyclable Ni-Cad battery pack with test switch and charge indicator. EMR is minimum of 90 minutes operation to meet code. Whip - Six feet long, wiring RHOS/Reach Compliant, 18 gauge, 600v rated, Specify wired to the fixture as an OPTION. The table above is a quick reference. When calculating loads make sure you add direct and indirect LPW to get total wattage. Please refer to photometric report for detailed information. Our light engines are precisely designed for optimal operation of LED assemblies. Our standard LED's CCT (correlated color temperature) range is 2700K to 4000K. Other CCT values are available upon request. We log LED bin codes for each project we supply to ensure color consistency and keep a record of those projects for future reference. CRI offered is 80+, and 90+ Note: on 90+ CRI use .85 multiplier Tunable white, warm dim and other special LED colors available. We design our own printed circuit boards to ensure high luminescence efficiency, low thermal resistance and long-term reliable operation. Light engines are easily replaced. We use only recognized brand LED's with 3 SDCM (standard deviation color matching) with high color consistency. 2 SDCM available upon request. LRP - “LED Reel Program” – LED’s for printed circuit boards come on reels’ like old 8mm projectors and they're sold in lots just like fabric. At Picasso Lighting, we have a program where we make sure all of your reels come from the same lot for each project. This ensures excellent color consistency in large open spaces. LED life is rated at 50,000 hours Custom Lumens Available Limited five-year (50,000 hours) warranty on all products. I.C. rated fixtures are available upon request. Change orders may effect delivery schedule. All fixtures are IBEW manufactured and assembled. UL and CUL listed for dry and damp locations. DLC® is a non-profit organization whose mission is to drive efficient lighting by defining quality, facilitating thought leadership, and delivering tools and resources to the lighting market through open dialogue and collaboration. We are currently getting our products listed with DLC. Products listed, will have DLC Logo. Chicago Plenum products are available upon request. Made in the U.S.A. Picasso Lighting Industries, LLC | 46 Sellers Street, Kearny NJ 07032 | T 201.246.8188 F 201.246.8122 Max 4 Flush Lens RECESSED STANDARD TYPE PROJECT Note: Picasso lighting industries, LLC reserves the right to make any design changes which will not affect the overall appearance or performance of the product. All ceilings to be adequately reinforced by others. All fixtures to be wired by licensed electrician only. The information contained herein is the sole property of Picasso Lighting Industries, LLC and may not be used without prior written consent of Picasso Lighting Industries, LLC. The ‘USGBC member logo’ is a trademark owned by the U.S. Green building council and is used by permission. The logo signifies only that Picasso Lighting Industries, LLC is a USGBC member; USGBC does not review, certify, or endorse the products or services offered by its members. Picasso Lighting Industries, LLC | 46 Sellers Street, Kearny NJ 07032 | T 201.246.8188 F 201.246.8122 Max 4 Flush Lens RECESSED STANDARD TYPE PROJECT © 2016 Axis Lighting Inc. 1.800.263.2947 [T] 514.948.6272 Product design and development is an ongoing process at Axis Lighting.We reserve the right to change specifications. Contact Axis for the latest product information. 1 / 6 File Name:Sculpt-Geometric.SPEC September 10, 2019 axislighting.com RECESSED MOUNT Ordering Guide CONTROLSENSORS compatible withArmstrong ceiling system SCRG PRODUCT ID NOM. LUMENS/FT CRI COLOR TEMP .SHIELDING SCRG Sculpt Recessed geometric 300 300 lm/ft - Minimum 80 80 CRI 27 2700 K FL flush500500 lm/ft - Maximum 90 90 CRI 30 3000 K 35 3500 K 40 4000 K Outputs between listed min and max are available.Consult factory for outputs outside of the listed range.Consult Axitune spec sheet for Axis color technology options All lens options use spotless lens Geometric CEILING KIT (select one)FINISH VOLTAGE DRIVER Triangle Parallelogram Trapeze TR75X2 75º - 2’PP75X2 75º positive- 2’TP75X2 75º - 2’W white 120 120 V DP dimming (0-10V) 1% TR75X4*75º - 4’PN75X2 75º negative - 2’TP75X4*75º - 4’C custom 277 277 V LT lutron (1) TR60X2 60º - 2’PP75X4*75º positive - 4’TP60X2 60º - 2’347 347 V BI bi-level dimming TR60X4*60º - 4’PN75X4*75º negative - 4’TP45X2 45º - 2’UNV universal O other (2) TR45X2 45º - 2’PP60X2 60º positive- 2’ TR90X2 90º right - 2'PN60X2 60º negative- 2’ TR90X4*90º right - 4'PP60X4*60º positive- 4’ TRP904X2 90º positive right - 2’x4'PN60X4*60º negative- 4’ TRN904X2 90º negative right - 2’x4'PP45X2 45º positive- 2’ PN45X2 45º negative- 2’ Available as kit; See pages 2-3 for more details;*Available with the 15/16” Prelude grid system.(1) Specify system(2) Please consult factory; see page 2Consult Axitune spec sheet for Axis color driver options CIRCUITS MOUNTING BATTERY (OPTIONAL)OTHER (OPTIONAL)IC CONTROL (OPTIONAL)CUSTOM 1 1 circuit MFTB15 MiniFlange t-bar 15/16” *B#battery pack F fuse (4)DS#daylight sensor (5)C custom 2 2 circuits MFTG9 MiniFlange 9/16” t-tegular *4’ sections FW(#)flex whip (6’ std)OS#occupancy sensor (5) +E(#)emergency section (3)CP Chicago plenum DOS#daylight & occupancy sensor (5) +NL(#)night light section (3) EN# enlighted integral (5) +GTD(#)generator transfer device (3) ENR#enlighted remote (6) WC#wireless control dimming 3) Specify quantity * See page 6 for Armstrong ceiling compatibility.Not available with 347VPlease consult factory (4) Requires 120V or 277V (5) For flush option only; Please consult factory (6) Please consult factorySpecify quantity. Requires 7" blankSee integrated controls guide for more details. Please specify Notes Type Project 3” 13/4” 11/2” Flush Geometric 5LED BO A R D & DRI V E RLUMINAIREWARRANTY YEAR EVEREST - TYPE F2_ALT © 2016 Axis Lighting Inc. 1.800.263.2947 [T] 514.948.6272 Product design and development is an ongoing process at Axis Lighting.We reserve the right to change specifications. Contact Axis for the latest product information. 2 / 6 File Name:Sculpt-Geometric.SPEC September 10, 2019 axislighting.com RECESSED MOUNT SCULPT GEOMETRIC FORM OPTIONS 4’between main t-bars 60°60°60° TR60X4 PP60X4 PN60X4 60º - 4’ 60º positive - 4’ 60º negative - 4’ 60° 2’between main t-bars 60°60°60°60° TR60X2 PP60X2 PN60X2 TP60X2 60º - 2’ 60º positive - 2’ 60º negative - 2’ 60º - 2’ 75° 75°75°75°75° 2’between main t-bars TR75X2 PP75X2 PN75X2 TP75X2 75º - 2’ 75º positive- 2’ 75º negative- 2’ 75º - 2’ 75°75°75° 4’between main t-bars 75° TR75X4 PP75X4 PN75X4 TP75X4 75º - 4’ 75º positive- 4’ 75º negative- 4’ 75º - 4’ © 2016 Axis Lighting Inc. 1.800.263.2947 [T] 514.948.6272 Product design and development is an ongoing process at Axis Lighting.We reserve the right to change specifications. Contact Axis for the latest product information. 3 / 6 File Name:Sculpt-Geometric.SPEC September 10, 2019 axislighting.com RECESSED MOUNT 90° 4’between main t-bars 4’ TR90X4 90° Right Triangles 2’between main t-bars 90°90°90°2’4’4’ TR90X2 TRP904X2 TRN904X2 90º right - 2’ 90º right - 4’ 90º positive right - 4’x2’ 90º negative right - 4’x2’ 2’between main t-bars 45° 2’between main t-bars 45° 45°45°45° TR45X2 PP45X2 PN45X2 TP45X2 45º - 2’ 45º - 2’ 45º positive - 2’ 45º negative - 2’ © 2016 Axis Lighting Inc. 1.800.263.2947 [T] 514.948.6272 Product design and development is an ongoing process at Axis Lighting.We reserve the right to change specifications. Contact Axis for the latest product information. 4 / 6 File Name:Sculpt-Geometric.SPEC September 10, 2019 axislighting.com RECESSED MOUNT Geometric Uniquely shaped lighting elements for creative ceiling designs Enjoy freedom from traditional ceiling footprints with a recessed family of 23 precision-tooled triangles, parallelograms and trapezoids. Discover new and exciting opportunities above and beyond the norm for architectural ceilings, brought to you by industry leaders Axis Lighting and Armstrong Ceiling Solutions. An exclusive palette of non-rectangular recessed lighting elements compatible with Armstrong DESIGNFlex Ceiling System. Geometric Lighting Benefits • Visually comfortable and esthetically pleasing traces of light. • Seamless integration with DESIGNFlex™ by Armstrong. • Easy installation – DESIGNFlex features pre-cut tile inserts. • Ceiling kits include all the required lightingware and hardware. 4’ 90° Right Triangles 2’ 2’ 2’ 45° 4’ 60° 2’ 4’ 75° 2’ © 2016 Axis Lighting Inc. 1.800.263.2947 [T] 514.948.6272 Product design and development is an ongoing process at Axis Lighting.We reserve the right to change specifications. Contact Axis for the latest product information. 5 / 6 File Name:Sculpt-Geometric.SPEC September 10, 2019 axislighting.com RECESSED MOUNT Axis lighting will warrant defective LEDs, boards, and drivers for 5 years from date of purchase. Warranty is valid if luminaire is installed and used according to specifications.If defective, Axis will send replacement boards or drivers at no cost along with detailed replacement instructions and instructions on how to return defective components to Axis. WARRANTY FINISH Powder coated and custom finishes are also available. CONSTRUCTION Housing Extruded aluminum (0.080'' nominal) up toEnd Cap Die cast aluminum Interior Brackets Die formed sheet steel (20 gauge) Lenses Extruded acrylic (0.060'' nominal) - injection moulded Hanger Die cast aluminum Suspension Sliding aircraft cable along product length Cable Grips Quick connecting / release LED SYSTEM CRI Minimum 80 or 90 color rendering indexCCTChoice of 3000K, 3500K and 4000K color temperature with a great color consistency (within 3.0–step MacAdam ellipse). LED life Minimum 50,000h with 85% of lumen maintenance in 250C ambient temperature, in compliance with IES LM-80 testing measurements. Thermal Management Aluminum housing acting as the heat sink to maximize life.SHIELDING - Frosted acrylic Spotless lens FL flush APPROVALS Certified to UL and CSA standards Meets CCEC requirements (Chicago plenum)Suitable for damp locations.IC Rated (Insulated ceiling) ELECTRICAL Lutron driver*LDE1 - EcoSystem H-Series (1%)LDE5 - EcoSystem 5-Series (5%)LTE - Hi-Lume® A-series 2Wires Forward Phase (1%) *Consult factory Other drivers DALI - Digital Addressable Lighting InterfaceDMX - Digital MultiplexLV - line voltage - Advance Mark 10Xitanium SR - For wireless sensorEmergencyIntegral emergency battery pack or emergency circuit optional.Input Voltage 120V, 277V, 347V, UNV. Incorporating these components may have limitations or affect the length of the luminaire. Please contact factory for more details. © 2016 Axis Lighting Inc. 1.800.263.2947 [T] 514.948.6272 Product design and development is an ongoing process at Axis Lighting.We reserve the right to change specifications. Contact Axis for the latest product information. 6 / 6 File Name:Sculpt-Geometric.SPEC September 10, 2019 axislighting.com RECESSED MOUNT With Integrated MiniFlange Integrated MiniFlange (patent pending) When installed along T-bars in acoustic ceilings, the Integrated MiniFlange supports adjacent ceiling tiles. At the same time, it eliminates the need for a second T-bar. This feature comes standard on Sculpt Recessed. • Fewer materials needed and less labor. • Conceals ceiling tile cutline for a cleaner appearance. • Simplifies drawings and trade coordination. • Available in different T-bar profiles. KIT AND LINEAR - WITH INTEGRATED MINIFLANGEKIT AND LINEAR - WITH INTEGRATED MINIFLANGE MiniFlange 9/16" T-TEGULARMFTG9 3” 31/2” 21/4” flange to flange lens width11/2” MiniFlange 15/16" T-BAR Prelude ceiling system by Armstrong Suprafine ceiling system by Armstrong MFTB15 3” 217/32” 319/32” 21/4” flange to flange T-bar to flange lens width11/2” 31/32” 29/32” 31/2” 21/4”flange to flange T-bar to flange lens width MiniFlange T-bar to flange211/32” Lumination™ LED Luminaires LED Recessed Luminaire LPL22 Value Series - Panel Light GE Lumination™ LPL Series Recessed LED Luminaires are a value product for commercial ceilings providing uniformity, efficiency and reduced glare for T-grid ceiling applications. For the premium reveal® TriGain™ Architectural flat panel design, please see details for the LET series. The LPL lumen maintenance of greater than L70 at 50,000 hours operation, allows for lower maintenance costs. It is suitable for indoor general lighting for both new construction and retrofit when luminaire’s are being replaced. The uniform light across the diffuser offers a distinctive, better look than traditional LED “two strip troffers”. End users can see the difference and enjoy the fresh new look of an LED luminaire. Product Description: Project name _________________ Date ________________________ Type ________________________ Product Dimensions: Light Output Range: 2000-4000 lumens CRI: 80+, R9>0 CCT: 3500K/4000K Efficacy: 100LPW Input Voltage: 120-277V Wattage Range: 20-40 watts Rated Lumen Depreciation: L70 @ 50,000 hrs. Limited Warranty: 5 Years Performance Summary: Ordering Information:1 (Important, Please see note 1 below) FAMILY LPL = Lumination Panel Light A = 1st Generation FInIsh OPTIOns3nOMInALLuMEns WhTE = White All options are sold separately as accessories, please see below 20 = 20004 33 = 330040 = 40004 FIxTuRE TYPE 22 = 2’ x 2’VQ = 0-10V Dimming MOunTIngCOnTROLs2 LT = T-Grid DIsTRIbuTIOnFInIsh MM = Medium Lambertian CRI/CCT 835 = 80CRI, 3500K840 = 80CRI, 4000K VOLTAgEgEnERATIOn 0 = 120–277V L P L 2 2 A 0 MM VQ L T Wh T E _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Listings: Ordering notes: 1. ALL LPL unITs ARE PRICED As sIngLE unITs AnD MusT bE ORDERED As sIngLE unITs In EVEn QuAnTITIEs As ThIs PRODuCT Is PACKED TWO PER bOx. IT shOuLD bE nOTED In RECEVIng DOCuMEnTs ThAT OnE bOx hAs TWO unITs AnD shOuLD bE RECIEVED As TWO unITs. 2. See accessories for wireless and sensor options 3. All options are accessories that are quickly and easily attached and/or wired to the luminaire in the field by the installer. 4. These configurations/lumen levels require additional manufacturing steps and therefore have a 10% price adder. LPL22A020MM835VQLTWHTE4 2000 20 100 3 LPL22A033MM835VQLTWHTE 3300 33 100 1 √ LPL22A040MM835VQLTWHTE4 4000 40 100 3 LPL22A020MM840VQLTWHTE4 2000 20 100 3 LPL22A033MM840VQLTWHTE 3300 33 100 1 √ LPL22A040MM840VQLTWHTE4 4000 40 100 3 ExAMPLE COnFIguRATIOns LuMInAIRE LuMEns LuMInAIRE LPW LuMInAIRE TOTAL sYsTEM WATT s shIPPIng LEAD TIME (WEEKs)Drywall Mount Kit 2 x 2 GESK07 67657 2 x 2 Surface Mount Kit for Backlit T-Grid B22 SMK 212462 347V kit LFAMBADVQFA 93071580 EMBB kit LFAMBA0VQFAEL 93071576 Wireless Enabled, Daintree Compatible kit LCAMBA0TQFA 93071586 (most commonly used option for Daintree) Wireless Enabled, Daintree Compatible with Daintree WFA 100 kit (allows for field LCAMBA0TSFA 93071585 connectivity to remote sensor) Wireless Enabled, Daintree Compatible + EMBB kit LCAMBA0TQFAEL 93071579 Wireless Enabled, Daintree Compatible with Daintree WFA 100 + EMBB kit LCAMBA0TSFAEL 93071578 Wireless Enabled, Daintree Compatible + Emergency Bypass kit(Dual Shunt Relay to be used with building generator backup systems LCAMBA0TQFAB2 93071583 to override dimming - Contact manufacturer prior to ordering to confirm application) Wireless Enabled, Daintree Compatible with Daintree WFA 100 + Emergency Bypass kit (Dual Shunt Relay to be used with building generator backup systems LCAMBA0TSFAB2 93071582 to override dimming - Contact manufacturer prior to ordering to confirm application) ACCEssORIEs DEsCRIPTIOn CODE PRODuCT CODE Please refer to the DLC QPL website for the latest and most complete information. http://www.designlights.org/QPL QuICKshIP Typical Specification: LuminationTM LPL22 Value Series — Panel Light All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Information provided is subject to change without notice. All values are design or typical values when measured under laboratory conditions. Current, powered by GE is a business of the General Electric Company. © 2017 GE. www.currentbyge.com IND472 (Rev 02/05/18) LED & Optical Assembly CRIa: >80 R9: >0 Color Consistency: Central limit 4-Step MacAdam Ellipse with LED recipe approach for tight unit to unit color control Rated Lumen Depreciation: L70 @ 50,000 hrs Electrical Input Voltage: 120-277V Input Frequency: 50/60Hz system Power Factor (PF): >0.9* Total harmonic Distortion (ThD): <20%* LED Driver Type: Class 2 * PF and THD may vary with options Ratings & Evaluations Operating Temperature: –20°C to +30°C storage Temperature: -40°C to +70°C surge Protection: ANSI C82.77 Complaint Location: Damp safety: UL/cUL Listed Environmental: RoHS compliant utility: DLC™ Qualified Product Listed, check www.designlights.org/QPL for specific products Construction & Finish housing: Durable, long lasting bezel construction. Aluminum extruded Lensing: Precision formed optical assembly Paint: Post painted powder coat finish on frame Weight: <10 pounds Controls standard Dimming: 0-10VDC ANSI C137.x compliant Minimum Dimming: 10% of rated lumen LED drive current Optional Dimming: N/A Wireless networking & sensing Devices:* — Daintree Wireless enabled — Daintree Systems (Wireless Only) Power Addition for Controls: <2 watts * Contact Factory for specific option availability Mounting Typical Mounting: Fits standard T-Bar grid (drop ceilings) Wiring Access: ½” trade-size KOs T-grid Clips: T-grid clips attached, with holes for seismic wires surface Mounting: Surface mount kit available Accessories and Options Optional Emergency battery: Provides 90-minutes of Emergency lighting Design Life & Warranty system Warranty: 5 Year Photometrics / POLAR gRAPh Zone Lumens 0-10 105.44 10-20 302.87 20-30 461.71 30-40 561.65 40-50 589.13 50-60 539.39 60-70 418.18 70-80 248.06 80-90 73.56 90-100 0.00 100-110 0.00 110-120 0.00 120-130 0.00 130-140 0.00 140-150 0.00 150-160 0.00 160-170 0.00 170-180 0.00 ZOnAL LuMEn suMMARY 278 557 835 1114 1 2